JP2021178227A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of outputting voice with consideration of an interest of a player.SOLUTION: When a double ready-to-win is displayed, and when a voice lamp control device 114 receives a probability variation pattern ready-to-win display command, then, voice data for outputting probability variation ready-to-win voice corresponding to a ready-to-win pattern which established a probability variation ready-to-win, is set in a ready-to-win voice area 223d5. Then, when the probability variation ready-to-win voice is output (S2343:No) by using the voice data set in the ready-to-win voice area 223d5, even if a normal pattern ready-to-win display command is received from a display control device 114, the display command is ignored (S2345). Thereby, on the voice lamp control device 114, by the normal pattern ready-to-win display command, the normal ready-to-win voice is not output. Therefore, when the double ready-to-win is displayed on a third pattern display device 81, only the probability variation ready-to-win voice can be listened by a player.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects are displayed on display devices such as liquid crystal displays to improve the interest of games.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-272159

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the audio output is not always performed in consideration of the interest of the player with respect to the effect image displayed on the display device.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing audio output in consideration of the interest of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a main control means for performing a main control of a game, a sub control means for controlling based on a control signal from the main control means, and a sub control means thereof. A display means for performing a variable effect accompanied by a dynamic display of the identification information by the control of the above, and a voice output means for outputting a voice are provided, and the identification information is displayed in advance in the variable effect performed by the display means. A predetermined game value is given to the player when the stop display is performed in the mode, and as the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means, a first effect mode and a second effect mode are used. The variable effect is described by the display means as the sound output by the sound output means, including the first effect mode and the third effect mode showing the second effect mode at the same time. A first sound output when the effect is performed in the first effect mode, and a second sound output when the variable effect is performed by the display means in the second effect mode. The sub-control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means is the display means. The notification means is provided with a notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the above, and the notification means first, as the display content in the display means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. The second effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means is notified by the notification means. When the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output based on the display content in the means and the notification means notify the second effect mode as the display content in the display means. , A non-accepting means for making all notifications from the notifying means non-accepting for a predetermined period after receiving the notification.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine of the gaming machine according to claim 1, and the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the operation of the identification information by the control of the sub-control means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect performed by the display means, which comprises a display means for performing a variation effect accompanied by a target display and an audio output means for outputting a voice. A predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the first effect mode are the effect modes of the variable effect performed by the display means. The variable effect is performed by the display means in the first effect mode as the sound output by the sound output means, including the third effect mode showing the second effect mode and the second effect mode at the same time. The sub-control means includes a first voice output in the case and a second voice output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode by the display means. The display control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means controls the display content in the display means by the voice. The notification means is provided with a notification means for notifying the means, and when the display means is to perform the variable effect in the third effect mode, the notification means first provides the second effect mode as the display content in the display means. The voice control means is notified, and then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means is based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means. When the output control means for selecting the voice to be output and starting the output and the notification means notify the second effect mode as the display content in the display means, after receiving the notification. Since it is provided with a non-reception means that makes all notifications from the notification means non-reception for a predetermined period, there is an effect that voice output can be performed in consideration of the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen and the effective line setting of the third symbol display device, and (b) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device when the double reach is established. It is a figure. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the main controller, and (b) schematically shows various data stored in the ROM in the main controller. It is a schematic diagram. It is a figure which schematically showed the structure of the various counters of the main control device, various holding ball storage areas, and various holding ball execution areas. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, and (c) is a diagram showing a variation pattern table for jackpots. An example is schematically shown, (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table, and (e) is a deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table. Is a diagram schematically showing. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice. Yes, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen instructing a player to "hit left", and (b) is a hitting ball instructing a player to "hit right". It is a schematic diagram which shows the direction instruction screen schematically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the right-handed-left-handed determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the right-handed-left-handed determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is explanatory drawing which showed the relationship between the passing of the ball of the 1st through gate 67, and the display of the hitting direction instruction screen which instructes right-handed hit when the game state is probable change or time saving, and (a) is It is a figure which showed the example which the ball passed only 2 balls through the 1st through gate 67 in 10 seconds, (b) is the figure which the ball passes by at least 3 balls through the 1st through gate 67 in 10 seconds. It is a figure which showed the example of the case. It is a flowchart which showed the audio reproduction setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction of the reach voice in the case where the double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the audio reproduction setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of the reach sound when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device, and (b) is the single reach of the probabilistic reach on the third symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction of the reach sound at the time of being displayed. It is a flowchart which showed the audio reproduction setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction of the reach voice in the case where the double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the various data stored in the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio reproduction setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction of the reach voice in the case where the double reach is displayed in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the various data stored in the RAM in the voice lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the audio reproduction setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 30, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyway 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later, or changing the effect content of the super reach. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is accompanied by a ball entering the first entry port 64 (starting start winning), which will be described later. Various effects such as variable effects and reach effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "sea stage" with a motif of the sea in shallow water, a "palace stage" with a motif of an undersea palace, a "deep sea stage" with a motif of the deep sea, etc. are prepared as stages. The stage change is performed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period during which the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation.

Further, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed into the super reach, the selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach is displayed during the normal reach. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, and rails 61 and 62. General winning opening 63, first entry opening 64, second entry opening 640, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, first through gate 67, second through gate 670, variable display device unit 80 Etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first entry opening 64, the second entry opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 were formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are arranged on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba which are light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. Has been done. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second ball opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the fluctuating state by the lighting state, or the stop symbol is probablely changed. Whether it is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb both display the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the big hit type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high-probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a big hit is increased as an added value after the end of the big hit, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640. The "low probability state" means a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the time-saving state (during the time-saving) in the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the hit probability of the second symbol increases and the second entry port It refers to the state of the game in which the ball easily enters the 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

The details will be described later, but during the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is opened is changed, and it is normal. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

It should be noted that, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, one hit. The change may be made to increase the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened at one time. At least one of the number of times to do may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is used. It may be changed so that only the hit probability is increased as compared with the normal time.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is set to the first symbol display device 37A, 37B while synchronizing with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") for displaying variable symbols, and a sphere of a first through gate 67 and a second through gate 670 are used as triggers. A second symbol display device 83, which is composed of LEDs that display the two symbols in a variable manner, is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an 8-inch size, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of upper, middle, and lower. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen and an effective line setting of the third symbol display device 81. 4 (b) is a diagram showing a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when a so-called double reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display area Dm that variablely displays the third symbol over almost the entire area of the screen. Further, in the lower center of the main display area Dm, among the balls entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed is held. A hold display area Db for displaying the number of balls is provided.

The third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is a 10-type main symbol consisting of 10 types of character symbols (turtle, shark, dugong, angelfish, etc.) corresponding to the numbers from "0" to "9". It is composed of one kind of sub-designs (in the present embodiment, a shark pattern) formed smaller than this main design. These main symbols and sub-symbols form a symbol sequence by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub-symbols between the main symbols.

When the pachinko machine 10 detects entry into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, a big hit lottery is performed, and the third symbol is combined with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 (LED37a). In the display device 81, the variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol is executed. The variation effect is performed so that the main symbol and the sub symbol scroll (horizontally scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity for each symbol row. As shown in FIG. 4, at the time of such side-scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed in each symbol row. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol rows are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in ascending order. ing.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol is displayed in the left, middle, and right three columns for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3), respectively. .. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols in 3 rows × 3 rows. Further, five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4A, five lines, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5, are set as effective lines.

In the pachinko machine 10, if a combination of jackpot symbols (for example, a combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 when the variable effect that scrolls sideways is stopped in each game, the jackpot is hit. The jackpot video is displayed as.

That is, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, a variation display (variation effect) in which the same main symbol is aligned on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is performed, and the variation effect ends. It is configured to generate a big hit afterwards. In the case of shifting to the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the jackpot (in the case of the probability change jackpot), a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols corresponding to the odd numbers (corresponding to the "probability variation symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the low probability state after the end of the big hit (in the case of the normal big hit), a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols corresponding to the even numbers (corresponding to the "normal symbol") are aligned.

The variation effect is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2. Then, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the same main symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. If this is the case, a screen notifying the fact is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as "reach established", and a voice notifying the reach is sent to the voice output device 226 provided in the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5). ) Is output. Here, the "reach" represents a state in which when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, a big hit may occur due to the stop displayed symbol in the middle symbol row Z2.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol rows appear in descending order in the upper symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols appear in the lower symbol row Z3. Since they are arranged so as to appear in ascending order, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed, the left and middle of the respective symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are displayed. -The arrangement of the third symbol in the three rows on the right may be the reverse arrangement. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 4 (b), in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbol (jugon) of "7", the sub symbol (shell), and the main symbol (shark) of "6" are arranged in order from the left. In the lower symbol row Z1, the main symbol (shark) of "6", the sub symbol (shell), and the main symbol (jugon) of "7" are arranged in order from the left, and the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged. The arrangement of the third symbol is reversed.

In this case, when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, if the middle symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 becomes the main symbol (shark) of "6", the main symbol of "6" on the effective line L4 ( Shark), that is, since the normal symbols corresponding to the even-numbered symbols are aligned, it becomes a normal jackpot, and after the jackpot ends, it shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, if the symbol in the middle of the middle symbol row Z2 is the main symbol (dugong) of "7", it is the main symbol (jugon) of "7" on the effective line L5, that is, the main symbol corresponding to the odd symbol. Since the probabilistic symbols are aligned, it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, and after the jackpot ends, it shifts to a high probability state. That is, the state shown in FIG. 4B may be a big hit on the two effective lines L4 and L5, and depending on the symbol stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it can be either a normal big hit or a probable big hit. It is in a possible state, that is, a "double reach" state in which two reach are established.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can achieve double reach in the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. By establishing this double reach, it becomes a mere single reach (a reach showing the possibility of a big hit only on one effective line when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed). In comparison, the player can be expected to have a higher possibility of becoming a big hit. In addition, it is possible to give the player more complicated emotions such as whether it is a probabilistic jackpot, a normal jackpot, or whether the probabilistic jackpot is neither a normal jackpot nor a normal jackpot, and the player is out of the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game.

The hold display area Db is an area for displaying the number of hold balls, which is the number of balls (hold balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered in the first entry port 64 and the second entry port 640. Is. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display devices 37A, 37B), the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The number of times of ball entry is reserved up to 4 times for the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, and up to 4 times for the ball entering the second ball entry port 640. The total value of the number of reserved balls in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also shown in the hold display area Db.

In the hold display area Db, one hold ball number symbol (● symbol in FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b)) is displayed for each hold ball number ball, and the hold ball number symbol is held according to the display number. The number of balls is displayed. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number symbol, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one, and when eight reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number is displayed. Indicates that is 8 balls. When the hold ball number symbol is not displayed in the hold display area Db, it indicates that the hold ball number is 0, that is, there is no hold ball.

In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. It may be set to the following or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Similarly, when entering the second ball entry port 640, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 and the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 640 are not limited to the same number of times, but are different. It may be set to the number of times. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the first entry port 64 may be set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls for entering the second entry port 640 may be set to two.

Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved display area Db, the reserved ball number is displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into one or a plurality is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with eight hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and may display the number of hold balls according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 sets the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined time each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is unsuccessful, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol of “◯” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 It is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than in the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 during the probability change and the time reduction.

It should be noted that the second entrance 640 during the probability change or the time reduction can be achieved by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit to increase the probability of hitting during the probability change or the time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time required for the variation display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the left side of the game board can pass through. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is attached to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured. When the ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs variable display, and if the winning lottery result is a hit, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the winning lottery result is out of order. If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of passages of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp. It is also lit and displayed at 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, but is three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). May be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entry port switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, a second ball entry port 640 in which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the second entry port 640, the second entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entry opening switch is turned on. A big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, respectively. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second entry port 640. The same configuration, but a different number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entry port 640. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entry port 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second entry port 640 is set to 5. You may.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. The electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged state), and the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

As described above, during the probabilistic change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, although details will be described later, the probability of a big hit is low in the case where the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entry opening 640. It is the same whether it is present or in a high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the first entry port 64 when the ball enters the second entry opening 640. It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first entry opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the first ball entry port 64 becomes a jackpot, the first is to stop the jackpot after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls are won).

Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second ball entry opening 640, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 650a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the entry into the second entry port 640 becomes a jackpot, the first is to stop the jackpot after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The LED 37Ba of the symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the specified winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

Both the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 have a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a, and the opening / closing plate on the front side with the lower side as an axis. It is equipped with a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing. The specific winning openings 65a and 650a are normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is provided in the game area, and when the LEDs 37Aa and LED37Ba corresponding to the jackpot are lit in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are set. It is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is specified when the ball wins in the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A gaming state that is released a predetermined number of times for a certain period of time may be formed as a special gaming state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. Run.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

Here, various data stored in the RAM 203 and the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 203, and FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the RAM 203 includes a special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, a special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special figure 2 Hold ball counter 203e, normal figure hold ball number counter 203f, normal figure 1 hold ball number counter 203 g, normal figure hold ball number counter 203h, normal figure hold ball storage area 203i, normal figure hold ball execution area 203j, special figure type flag It has at least 203k.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the ROM 202 has at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c202c, and a missed variation pattern table 202d202d.

Further, in the main control device 110, the main pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83, as described above. In order to execute the process, the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 7) for storing various counters.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202, and various holding ball storages provided in the RAM 203 are stored. Areas 203a, 203b, 203i and various reserved ball execution areas 203c, 203j will be described. First, FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

To set the display of the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 21). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer at the update timing of the counter for each counter and uses the value of the counter. Update.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), reaches the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899), and then becomes 0. It is configured to return to. When the first random number counter C1 is updated once (when it is periodically updated from a certain initial value and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is used. Is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the first random number counter C1 is updated from the newly read initial value.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), for example. Then, as will be described in detail later, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is provided in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. It is stored in one of the reserved special figures 1 reserved areas 1 to 4. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball opening 640 (starting prize), the value of the first random number counter C1 at that time is set in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. It is stored in any of the 1st to 4th areas.

The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device. The first random number stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b at the timing when the ball wins (starting prize) in the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a (the jackpot random number value), the MPU 201 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 8A. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for a low probability state (a state in which the probability change is not in progress) and one for a high probability state (a state in which the probability change is in progress) in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than the low probability state. The number of random numbers that are the jackpots included in each is set differently. By making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that are big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the big hit random number values "7,307,582" are "low" in the "game state". It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the "probability state".

On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers in the high probability state is 30, and the jackpot random numbers "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448". , 486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,833,866,892 "is associated with the" high probability state "of the" game state "and is a big hit. It is stored in the random number table 202a.

In the present embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value associated with the "low probability state" and the jackpot random number value associated with the "high probability state" are duplicated values. Each jackpot random number value is set so that it does not become. If there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. As in the present embodiment, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot is predicted by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it can be made difficult to do, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) is added. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the present embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), for example. Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special figure 1 reserved provided in the area 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball opening 640 (starting prize), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is stored together with the value of the first random number counter C1 in the special figure 2 reserved ball of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special figure 2 reserved provided in the area 203b.

Here, any of the holding areas 1 in the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203b or the special drawing 2 holding ball storage area 203c (either the special drawing 1 holding first to fourth area or the special drawing 2 holding first to fourth area). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in () is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type"). (Called) is the one at the time of disengagement. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c is a big hit, the random number is set in the variation effect. The fluctuation pattern and stop type are those at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 6B) stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 8B. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "4R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning to the first entry slot 64 is a jackpot, and the second entry When the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the mouth 640 is a jackpot, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is separately defined.

In the example of FIG. 8B, as a correspondence between the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2, " The jackpot type table for "1st entrance" is specified as follows. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation jackpot. That is, when a big hit is made with winning the first ball opening 64, the big hit type has a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) and becomes a 15R probability variable big hit, which is 1/4 (= 25/100). ) Will be a 15R normal jackpot, and a 1/2 (= 50/100) probability will be a 4R probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, as a correspondence between the jackpot type when the result of the jackpot lottery performed based on the winning of the second entry slot 640 is a jackpot and the value of the first hit type counter C2, it is for the "second entry slot". The jackpot type table of is specified as follows. That is, the value "0 to 24" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 4R probability variation jackpot, and the value "25 to 49" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. The value "50 to 99" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot. In other words, if a big hit occurs with the winning of the second ball opening 640, the big hit type will be a 15R probability variable big hit with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) Will be a 15R normal jackpot, and a 1/4 (= 25/100) probability will be a 4R probability variation jackpot.

In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the first entry port 64 when the ball enters the second entry opening 640. It is set higher than when it hits a ball. On the other hand, as described above, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol. Three stops (reach other than front and back), "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "completely off" where reach does not occur. Direction) The pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), for example. Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the special figure 1 reserved provided in 203a. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second entry port 640 (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the special figure 2 holding ball storage area of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the holding areas of the special drawing 2 holding first to fourth areas provided in 203b.

In the reserved area 1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (either the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved ball first to fourth area). If the value of the stored first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, the stop type is selected as the stop type at the time of disconnection based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. NS.

Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3, a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. It becomes easier to select "completely off". In this table, the "reach outside the front and rear" is narrowed to 98,99 and the "reach other than the front and rear" is also narrowed to 90 to 97, making it difficult to select "reach outside the front and back" or "reach other than the front and rear". In the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random value corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for determining a variation pattern, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, reach a maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 21).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting winning), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is used. It is stored in any of the holding areas of the special drawing 1 holding first to fourth areas provided in the above. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in any of the holding areas of the special drawing 2 holding first to fourth areas provided in the above.

The MPU 201 determines fluctuation patterns such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach by the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern tables 202bc and 203d (FIG. 7B) stored in the ROM 202. The determination of the fluctuation pattern is specifically the determination of the fluctuation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determine the variation mode.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of a jackpot and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d used at the time of a miss are prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern table 202d, the deviation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation pattern table 202d1 are used depending on whether the gaming state is a low probability state during normal time excluding the time reduction, or during the time reduction or probabilistic change. For (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2 is prepared.

Here, either the holding area 1 in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203c (either the special drawing 1 holding first to fourth area or the special drawing 2 holding first to fourth area). If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in () is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area is from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. It is determined.

In addition, one of the reserved areas 1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (one of the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth areas and the special figure 2 reserved first to fourth areas). ), The value of the first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, when the game state is in the low probability state of normal except during the time reduction. When the stop pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern and the gaming state is during the time reduction or probability change. , The stop pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same holding area as the first random number counter C1 is determined from the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern.

FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. The fluctuation patterns selected in the case of a big hit include various normal reach, various super reach, and various special reach, and among these fluctuation patterns, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. ) Is selected.

Here, the various types of Noor reach are fluctuation patterns in which the fluctuation time is as short as 30 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). .. The various super reach is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is 60 seconds, which is longer than that of the normal reach, and the first symbol (or the third symbol) is performed after a relatively long reach (for example, a long reach or a reach that develops from the normal reach). ) Is a uniform variation pattern. Various special reach is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds, which is even longer than various super reach. It is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after different special reach, etc.).

In addition, "various reach" means that there are many different production contents in each reach. For example, in super reach, a reach that displays a rear image by changing it quickly or a certain character is used. There is a reach that is displayed suddenly, and in addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as one with a notice effect before the start of fluctuation and one with a effect that becomes a big hit due to re-variation.

As shown in FIG. 8 (c), also in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c, the gaming state is normal and the time is shortened, as in the case of the deviation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e)). Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is different between the probability change and the transition.

Specifically, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the game state is normal is 0 to 50 for various normal reach, 51 to 179 for various super reach, and 180 for various special reach. It is ~ 198. On the other hand, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability change is 0 to 149 for various normal reach and 150 to 198 for various super reach.

In the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8 (c), when the gaming state is normal, various super reach and special reach with a long variation time are easily selected as variation patterns. On the other hand, when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability change, various normal reach with a short fluctuation time are easily selected as the fluctuation pattern.

During normal times, the probability of becoming a big hit is low, so various super reach and special reach with long fluctuation times are often selected as fluctuation patterns, so that while various super reach and special reach are performing variable production. , It is possible to greatly increase the expectation that the player will be a big hit. On the other hand, during the time reduction or the probability change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start winning is likely to occur at the second entrance 640. Therefore, if many fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times are selected during the time reduction or probabilistic change, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation effect, which gives the player a waiting state and may cause discomfort to the player. There is. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change, it is configured so that various normal reach with a shorter fluctuation time than the normal time can be easily selected, and the next fluctuation display is started at an early stage. The possibility of causing discomfort to a person can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202c shown in FIG. 8C, various special reach types are not selected when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability change. Details will be described later, but various special reach will not be selected in case of deviation. That is, when the variable effect is performed by the special reach, it means that it is a 100% big hit. Here, during the probabilistic change, the game state is always a big hit for the player, so if the variable effect is performed by the special reach during the probable change, the variable effect will end earlier than the joy of the big hit. Then, the dissatisfaction that I want you to shift to the special game state (big hit state) will be strongly felt. In the pachinko machine 10, the variable effect by the special reach is not performed during the time reduction or the probability change, so that such dissatisfaction of the player can be avoided.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between each fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same depending on whether the gaming state is during the time reduction or during the probability change. The correspondence between the pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c may be specified so that various special reach types are selected as the variation pattern during the time reduction. Since it is not always guaranteed that the game will be a big hit during the time reduction, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game will be a big hit by performing a variable effect by special reach.

Further, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a big hit or a reach effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established, the last. The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, the front-back deviation of one symbol) may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 8D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached. In the reserved area 1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (either the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved ball first to fourth area). If the value of the stored first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the first is when the game state is in the low probability state of normal except during the time reduction. Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the hit random number counter C1, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is for deviation. (Normal) Determined from the variation pattern table 202d1.

For complete deviation only, there are short deviations where the fluctuation ends in a short time (7 seconds) and the reach is not established, and long deviations where the fluctuation time is longer than the short deviations (10 seconds) but the reach is not established. The correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for the short deviation and 99 to 198 for the long deviation. In addition, there are various types of normal reach, which have a reach but a short fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and various types of super reach, which have a longer fluctuation time of 60 seconds than the normal reach, and correspond to the value of the variation type counter CS1. The normal reach is 0 to 149, and the super reach is 150 to 198.

FIG. 8E is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 8 (e), the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, as in the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is referred to when the reach is determined except for the complete detachment with short detachment and long detachment, and the reach other than front and rear detachment reach and front and rear detachment. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the reserved area 1 in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203b or the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203c (either the special figure 1 reserved first to fourth area or the special figure 2 reserved ball first to fourth area). If the value of the stored first random number counter C1 is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of order, the same holding area is used when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change. According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is from the deviation pattern table 202d2. It is determined.

The correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for short deviation and 191 to 198 for long deviation. Further, the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 190 for each type of normal reach and 191 to 198 for various types of super reach.

Since the disengagement (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and the start prize is won at the second entrance 640. Is likely to occur. Therefore, if there are many long deviations during the time reduction or probabilistic change, it takes time to start the next fluctuation display, which gives the player a waiting state and may cause discomfort to the player. There is sex. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, when the gaming state is in the reduced working hours state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the short deviation is configured to be easier to select than in other cases, and the next variation display is started at an early stage. It can reduce the possibility of causing discomfort to a person. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Further, in the deviation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation pattern table 202d2, which are referred to in the case of deviation, various special reach that can be selected as the variation pattern in the case of a big hit are not selected. As a result, if a variable effect is performed by special reach, it will be a 100% big hit. Further, even in the case of a big hit, the special reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern only when the gaming state is normal, and the probability of being selected is as low as 10/199. Therefore, the special reach can be made to feel to the player as a special variation effect, and can give the player great joy when the variation effect by the special reach is performed.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but even if the game state is normal, there are a plurality of reserved balls. In the case of (for example, if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage), the variation display may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the variation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 8 (d) and 8 (e), short deviations and long deviations are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Short deviation and long deviation may be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of various counters will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is a counter used for the winning lottery of the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83, and is added one by one in the range of 0 to 250, for example. It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

The value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) in the present embodiment, and when it is detected that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. It is acquired and stored in one of the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i provided in the RAM 203.

In the second hit random number counter C4, the number of hit random numbers in the normal game state is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit when the gaming state is normal, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as (2 symbols), and the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time. Further, the number of random numbers to be hit during the game state during the time reduction or the probability change is 250, and the range is "1 to 250". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change, and the second symbol display device 83 stops. A symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 640a of the second entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time longer than in the normal state.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period. Further, as described above, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, the symbol "○" is easily displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entry opening 640 is a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second entry slot 640. It is set higher than when the ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 14). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 21).

By the way, the RAM 203 stores the special figure 1 hold ball composed of four hold areas (special figure 1 hold 1st to 4th areas) in which each counter value is stored for the ball entering the first ball entry port 63. Area 203a is provided. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the second ball entry port 64. Although not shown, the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b also has four holding areas (special drawing 2 holding first to fourth areas) like the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a. ..

Each of the holding areas provided in the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a is a first random number counter acquired from the counter buffer by entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second entry ball opening 640. C1, first hit type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1 for storing values, first random number counter storage area 203a1, first hit type counter storage area 203a2, variation pattern selection counter It has a storage area 203a3 and a variable type counter storage area 203a4. Further, although not shown, any of the holding areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the special figure 2 has the same random number counter C1 per first as the holding areas of the holding ball storage area 203a of the special figure 1. A storage area for storing the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is provided.

In the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a first random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection acquired from the counter buffer according to the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64. Each value of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At this time, if there is no hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and all of the special figure 1 hold 1st to 4th areas are empty areas, the counters of each counter are in the special figure 1 first hold area. The value is stored. If there is only one hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold 1st area, the value of each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold 2nd area. Store.

If there are two holds in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold 1st and 2nd areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold 3rd area. Stores the value of. If there are three holds in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the value of each counter is stored only in the special figure 1 hold 1st to 3rd areas, each counter is stored in the special figure 1 hold 4th area. Stores the value of. As a result, the values of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning are set in the order in which the starting winnings are made to the first entry opening 64, in the special figure 1 hold 1st area and the special figure 1 hold 2nd. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 1 hold third area, and the special figure 1 hold fourth area.

On the other hand, in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop are acquired from the counter buffer in accordance with the timing of entering the second ball entry port 640. Each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is stored. Which of the holding areas (the first to fourth areas of the holding ball of the special figure 2) in which the value of each counter is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b of the special figure 2 is determined by the holding stored in the holding ball storage area 203b of the special figure 2. Based on the number, it is determined by the same method as in the case of the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. As a result, the value of each counter acquired from the counter buffer at the timing of the start winning is set in the order in which the start winning is given to the second entrance 640, in the special figure 2 hold 1st area and the special figure 2 hold 2nd. It can be stored in the area, the special figure 2 hold third area, and the special figure 2 hold fourth area.

If the start winning prize to the first entry port 64 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the first to fourth areas on hold in Special Figure 1, the value of each counter at that time. Is discarded without being held. Similarly, if the start winning prize to the second entrance 640 is detected when the value of each counter is stored in all of the reserved 1st to 4th areas of Special Figure 2, the starting prize of each counter at that time is detected. The value is discarded instead of being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the values of the counters can be held at each of the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 up to a maximum of four starting prizes.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a special figure holding ball execution area 203c. At the start timing of the variation effect, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b. The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CS1 are the first random number counter storage area 203c1 and the first hit type provided in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, respectively. It is moved to the counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

Further, if there is no hold in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b and there is a hold in the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a is in the special figure 1 hold first area. The stored values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are moved to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, respectively. Then, the values of the counters stored in the first random number counter storage area 203c1, the first hit type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 of the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. Based on the above, a big hit lottery, a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

In the first symbol display device 37, the variation effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and the stop type. Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

In this way, if there is a hold in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b, each counter stored in the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b regardless of whether or not the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a is held. The value of is moved to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and based on the value of each counter stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, a big hit lottery, a variation pattern of a variation effect, and a determination of a stop symbol type are determined. Is done. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the start winning prize at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the start winning prize at the first entrance 64, and the jackpot lottery is performed, and the variable effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. It is configured as follows.

The value of each counter in the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the special figure 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the value of each counter in the special figure 2 holding ball first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b is After being moved to the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 reserved second area or the special figure 2 reserved second area is changed to the vacant special figure 1 reserved first area or special figure 2. FIG. 2 Shifts to the reserved first area. Then, the value of each counter stored in the special figure 1 hold 3 area or the special figure 2 hold 3 area is shifted to the special figure 1 hold 2 area or the special figure 2 hold 2 area where the value is vacant, and the special figure 1 The value of each counter stored in the holding 4th area or the special drawing 2 holding 4th area is shifted to the vacant special drawing 1 holding 3rd area or the special drawing 2 holding 3rd area.

As a result, when the fluctuation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the holding by the second entrance 640 is reduced by one, and the special figure 2 holding ball is reduced by one. One area of the storage area 203b is opened. Further, when the fluctuation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the hold by the first entry port 64 is reduced by one, and the special figure 1 reserved ball is stored. One area of area 203a is opened.

In the pachinko machine 10, regardless of the presence or absence of data in each holding area, each data in the holding area (second to fourth) is configured to shift to an area having a smaller area number. Data may be shifted only for the hold area in which (values of various counters) are stored (held). For example, the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a before the data shift is 2, and the special figure 1 reserved first area and the special figure 1 reserved second area If the data is stored only in the case, after shifting the data in the special figure 1 hold 1st area to the special figure hold ball execution area 203c, the data in the special figure 1 hold 2nd area is transferred to the special figure 1 hold first area. The shift process may be completed by shifting to one area. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the hold area in which the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the special figure 1 hold 3rd to 4th areas), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

The RAM 203 also has a general diagram consisting of four holding areas (general drawing holding first to fourth areas) in which each counter value is stored for the passage of a sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. A holding ball storage area 203i is provided. Each holding area is a second random number counter storage area for storing the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer by the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, respectively. It has 203i1.

In the normal figure reserved ball storage area 203i, the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer is stored in accordance with the passing timing of the ball in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. At this time, if there is no hold in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i and all of the normal figure hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the second random number counter C2 is in the normal figure hold area. The value of is stored. If there is only one hold in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203a and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored only in the normal figure hold first area, the second hit random number is stored in the normal figure hold second area. Stores the value of counter C4. If there are two holds in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the normal figure hold first and second areas, the third area is in the normal figure hold third area. Stores the value of the random number counter C4 per 2. If there are three holds in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203a and the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored only in the normal figure hold first to third areas, the fourth area is in the normal figure hold fourth area. Stores the value of the random number counter C4 per 2.

As a result, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer at the passing timing of the sphere is held in the order in which the passage of the sphere is detected in the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670. It can be stored in 1 area, the 2nd area for holding the normal figure, the 3rd area for holding the normal figure, and the 4th area for holding the normal figure. If the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in all of the first to fourth areas on hold of the normal figure, and the passage of the sphere is detected at the first or second through gates 67 and 670, , The value of the second random number counter C4 at that time is discarded without being reserved.

The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal figure holding ball execution area 203j. At the start timing of the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), if there is a hold in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i, it is stored in the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i. Each value of the second hit random number counter C4 is transferred to the second hit random number counter storage area 203j1 provided in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j. Then, a winning lottery for the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second hit random number counter storage area 203j1 of the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j.

When the value of the second random number counter C4 in the normal figure holding first area of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is moved to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j, it is subsequently stored in the normal figure holding second area. The value of the second random number counter C4 is shifted to the vacant first area for holding the normal map. Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the random number counter C4 for the second hit stored in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. It will be shifted to the third area where the value is vacant.

As a result, when the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is started based on the value of the second random number counter C4 reserved in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203i, only one ordinary symbol is reserved. The number is reduced, and one area of the normal drawing reserved ball storage area 203i is opened.

In the pachinko machine 10, when data shift processing is performed between the holding areas (the first to fourth areas of the holding ball of the normal figure) of the holding ball storage area 203i of the normal figure, regardless of the presence or absence of data in each holding area. Instead, each data in the hold area (Public figure hold 2nd to 4th areas) was configured to shift to the area where the area number is 1 smaller, but the data (values of various counters) are the same as in the case of the special figure. Data may be shifted only for the hold area in which) is stored (held). For example, the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) held in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i before the data shift is 2, and only in the normal figure holding first area and the normal figure holding second area. If the data is stored, the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203j for holding the normal figure, and then the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure. , The shift process may be terminated. As a result, the data shift process is not performed for the hold area in which the data is not stored (held) (in the above example, the normal figure hold 3rd to 4th areas), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the RAM 203 will be continued. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are the first ball entry ports detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (standby) of the variation effect (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of times) up to 4 times each. The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S1613 in FIG. 20). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. On the other hand, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203b are decremented by 1 each time the variation effect is executed.

Further, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of reserved balls) is such that each counter value is set in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64. When it is stored, it is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 1 hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special figure 1 hold ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1. ..

Further, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is such that each counter value is set in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b based on the ball entering the second entry port 640. When it is stored, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special figure 2 reserved ball number command output from the main control board. The special figure 2 hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the special figure 2 hold ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1. ..

The voice lamp control device 113 is held by the special figure 1 hold ball number command and the special figure 2 hold ball number command, and is held in the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect due to the start winning to the second entrance 640. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect without accessing the main control device 110 (Special Figure 1 Hold Ball Count Counter 223a and Special Figure 2 in FIG. 9C). Hold ball count counter 223b). Further, by transmitting a hold ball number command from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a start winning prize is detected, the number of hold balls of the variable effect managed by the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if the number of reserved balls deviates from the actual number of reserved balls held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

It should be noted that the number of reserved balls (special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a) and the second entry port 640 for the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entry port 64 managed in the voice lamp control device 113. The number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect (special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) accompanying the start winning of the above is based on the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113 from the main control device 110. It is updated at the timing of setting the mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the timing of starting the variation effect). That is, if the variable effect to be started is associated with the start winning of the first ball opening 64, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect accompanying the starting winning of the first ball opening 64 is decremented by 1, and the variation to be started. If the effect is associated with the start winning of the second ball opening 640, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect associated with the start winning of the second ball opening 640 is reduced by one.

Whether the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation type is indicated by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation pattern command transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is associated with the start winning of the first ball opening 64 in the main control device 110. It includes information indicating whether it is associated with the start winning prize at the second entrance 640. In the voice lamp control device 113, whether the fluctuation effect to be started is due to the start winning to the first ball entry port 64 based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command, or the start to the second ball entry port 640. It is judged whether it is due to a prize, and based on the judgment result, the number of reserved balls of the variable effect due to the start winning to the first entry hole 64 and the change due to the start winning to the second entry opening 640. Processing is performed to reduce any one of the reserved balls in the production by 1.

Further, each time the number of reserved balls managed internally changes, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the number of reserved balls for the variable effect associated with the start winning to the first entry port 64 with respect to the display control device 114. , Sends a display-reserved ball number command for notifying the number of reserved balls, which is the sum of the number of reserved balls in the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entry opening 640. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbols for the number of reserved balls notified by this display reserved ball number command in the reserved display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, in the hold display area Db, the number of variable displays (number of hold balls) held by the start winning to the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 is shown to the player.

The ball passes through the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds in the normal figure reserved ball count counter 203f. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the above-mentioned, up to four times. Zero is set as the initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S1613 in FIG. 20). Then, each time the starting prize is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 (S1503 to S1504 and S1508 to S1509 in FIG. 18). On the other hand, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is executed.

The fluctuation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) can be held up to four times by the normal figure holding ball number counter 203f. Further, the second symbol holding lamp 84 (see FIG. 2) corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the normal figure holding ball number counter 203f is turned on. As a result, the player is notified of the number of reserved balls in the variation display of the second symbol.

The special symbol type flag 203k indicates whether the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), which is a special symbol, is executed in association with the start winning to the first entrance 64, or the second entrance. It is a flag indicating whether or not it is executed with the start winning of 640. When the special symbol type flag 203k is off, it is shown that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed in association with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, and the special symbol type is shown. When the flag 203k is on, it is shown that the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed in association with the start winning to the second entrance 640.

This special symbol type flag 203k is set to off or on at the initial stage of setting the start of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol). Specifically, when the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, and the start to the second entry port 640. If the values of the various counters acquired in connection with the winning are held in the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the various counters stored in the special figure 2 holding first area of the special figure 2 holding ball storage area 203b. The value of is shifted to the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to ON (see S1304 to S1307 in FIG. 16).

Further, when the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) is reached, the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0, while the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is. If the values of various counters larger than 0 and acquired in connection with the start winning to the first ball entry port 64 are held in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203a The values of the various counters stored in the special figure 1 hold first area are shifted to the special figure hold ball execution area 203c, and the special figure type flag 203k is set to off (see S1304, S1309 to S1312 in FIG. 16). ).

In MPU201, when it is determined as a big hit by the big hit lottery performed at the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol), it is special as a big hit type table (see FIG. 8 (b)) used for determining the big hit type. Based on the figure type flag 203k, either one for the "first ball entry port" or the one for the "second ball entry port" is set. Specifically, when the special symbol type flag 203k is off, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in association with the start winning to the first entrance 64. Therefore, a jackpot type table for the "first entrance" is set. On the other hand, when the special symbol type flag 203k is on, the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) determined to be a big hit is executed in association with the start winning to the second entrance 640. , Set the jackpot type table for the "second entrance".

As described above, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot when winning the first ball opening 64 is a 15R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 1/4 (= 25/100), and 1/4 (= 25/100). ) Will be a 15R normal jackpot, and a 1/2 (= 50/100) probability will be a 4R probability variation jackpot. In addition, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot when winning the second ball opening 640 is a 15R probability variable jackpot with a probability of 1/2 (= 50/100), which is 1/4 (= 25/100). There is a probability of a 15R normal jackpot, and a 1/4 (= 25/100) probability of a 4R probability variation jackpot. That is, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the first entry port 64 when the ball enters the second entry opening 640. It is set higher than the case.

As described above, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640, and the ease of entering the ball into the second entry port 640 changes according to the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the various areas, counters, and flags shown in FIG. 6A, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags. It also has a work area (work area) in which values such as counters and I / O are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 21) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 19) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 can issue various commands to these via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal.

Further, various switches 208 including a group of switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 19) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. Notify the display control device 114 by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

Here, the details of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least an audio data storage area 222a.

The audio data storage area 222a is an area for storing audio data, which is data for reproducing audio output from the audio output device 226. The voice data storage area 222a is a case where a voice output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a light emission effect image in which a predetermined area is brightly emitted on the third symbol display device 81 are displayed. The voice data corresponding to each type of voice, such as the voice to be output to the third symbol display device 81 and the voice to be output when a reach occurs during the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “reach voice”), is stored. There is.

When the MPU 221 receives a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reads audio data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command from the audio data storage area 222a of the ROM 222222. The voice reproduced based on the voice data is output from the voice output device 226. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be made to output the voice data matching the display contents from the voice output device 226.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 according to the command received from the main control device 110 and the operation state of the frame button 22 by the player, and the determined display mode is determined. Is instructed to the display control device 114 by a command. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to select voice data according to the determined display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and output the voice reproduced by the voice data from the voice output device 226. Is also possible. However, the pachinko machine 10 receives a display command indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 81, and makes a voice according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command. Data is selected, and the voice reproduced by the voice data is output from the voice output device 226.

As a result, even if an image different from the display mode determined by the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 due to some reason such as noise, the display command received from the display control device 114 causes the first image. Since the display content of the 3 symbol display device 81 can be grasped, it is possible to output the voice according to the display content actually displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226. Further, by notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114 by a sequential display command, the display timing of the image in the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 113 The output timing of the audio can be easily matched, and the occurrence of sound deviation can be suppressed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 10, different voice data is prepared for each of the main symbols of the third symbol (10 kinds of character symbols corresponding to the numbers "0" to "9") as the reach voice. Specifically, when a normal reach (a reach that becomes a 15R normal jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of "0" as the reach symbol, the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of "0" (for example). , "Scorpion fish"), the 0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0, which is voice data for reproducing the voice "reach!", Is stored in the voice data storage area 222a. When a probability variation reach (a reach that becomes a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation jackpot when the symbols are aligned) occurs with the main symbol of "1" as the reach symbol, the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol of "1" (for example, The first symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a1, which is voice data for reproducing the voice of "reach!" With the voice of "octopus"), is stored in the voice data storage area 222a.

Also, for each of the main symbols "2" to "9", when a normal reach or a probable change reach occurs with the main symbol as the reach symbol, the voice of the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol is "reach!" , "Reach!", "Reach!", Etc. are stored in the voice data storage area 222a as the second symbol normal reach voice data 222a2 to the ninth symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a9, respectively. Has been done.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10, when reach occurs, the reach voice is changed for each main symbol that has become the reach symbol. Moreover, the reach voice is output as the voice of the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the character arranged on the main symbol, which has become the reach symbol, is notifying the reach. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the main symbol corresponding to the even number is the reach symbol, as described above, when the symbols are aligned, a 15R normal jackpot is generated. Further, when the main symbol corresponding to the odd number is the reach symbol, a 4R probability variation jackpot or a 15R probability variation jackpot occurs when the symbols are aligned.

In this pachinko machine 10, the reach voice output when a reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to an odd number is defined as a "probability variation reach voice", and the reach voice output when a reach occurs in the main symbol corresponding to an even number. Is referred to as "normal reach voice" to distinguish between the two.

Here, the difference between the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (b). FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice.

As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice starts playing the sound section as soon as the playing starts, and a voice such as "reach!" Is uttered. Then, after a predetermined time (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B), the sound section ends and at the same time, the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice ends. On the other hand, when the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started, the silent section is reproduced for a certain period of time, 20 milliseconds in the present embodiment, and then a predetermined time length (1500 milliseconds in the example of FIG. 9B). ) Plays the sounded section. That is, when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started, there is no sound for the first 20 milliseconds, and then a voice such as "reach!" Is uttered.

The time length of the sounded section is not limited to 1500 milliseconds, and may be any time length. Further, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice may have different time lengths, and the length of the sounded section is an arbitrary time length for each of the reach voice data 222a to 222a9 corresponding to each main symbol. May be set to.

As described above with reference to FIG. 4B, the pachinko machine 10 is usually stopped by the symbols displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 at the stage where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed. A double reach that can be a big hit or a probable big hit is established. In other words, normal reach and probabilistic reach occur at the same time.

In the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the display control device notifies the voice lamp control device of "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device. And a display command notifying that "normal reach is established" are transmitted, and the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device in the voice lamp control device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

Furthermore, when the double reach is established, the player expects that the probability variable jackpot will be established as a jackpot rather than the normal jackpot because the jackpot probability will be higher after the jackpot. .. Therefore, when considering the expectations of the player, when the double reach is uttered, the voice of the character corresponding to the main symbol that establishes the probabilistic reach is more than the voice of the character corresponding to the main symbol that establishes the normal reach. There is also a request to let the player hear the reach voice by voice, that is, to let the player hear the probabilistic reach voice.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first establishes the probabilistic reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to send a reach display command to notify the establishment of reach together with the type of symbol, and then immediately send a reach display command to notify the establishment of reach together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach. Keep it. On the other hand, in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, when each display command is received from the display control device 113, the voice data corresponding to the display content indicated by the display command is immediately read from the voice data storage area 222a. Then, the sound is reproduced and output from the sound output device 226. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then outputs the probabilistic reach voice. Immediately, the normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established is output.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, in the probabilistic reach voice, the reproduction of the sound section is started as soon as the reproduction is started, and the voice such as "reach!" Is uttered. On the other hand, since the normal reach sound is a silent section for about 20 milliseconds even when the reproduction is started, the normal reach sound is started to be reproduced without any sound.

As soon as the MPU221 starts playing the reach voice, it confirms the number of reach voices currently being played. Then, when there are two reach voices currently being played, the most recently played reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice that has been started to be played later is stopped. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach sound is reproduced to the end. Further, since the normal reach sound has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds, even if the normal reach sound is once started to be played, the normal reach sound is stopped during the playback of the silent section. .. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

When the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display command for notifying "normal reach is established" together with the reach symbol is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp is transmitted. Based on the display command, the control device 113 outputs the normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established. In this case as well, the first 20 milliseconds are silent sections, but even if a voice such as "reach!" Is output with a delay of 20 milliseconds, humans do not feel that the output is delayed. Further, if the image that moves in perfect synchronization with the voice is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the voice such as "reach!" Is output with a delay of about 20 milliseconds, the sound shifts between the voice and the display. Does not make the player feel that this has occurred. Therefore, even if a silent section of 20 milliseconds is initially set in the normal reach voice, there is no problem.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time length of the silent section of the normal reach voice is set to 20 milliseconds, but the time length does not make the voice such as "reach!" Any setting may be made as long as there is no time range in which the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 do not cause a sound shift.

In the voice data storage area 222a, other voice data 222a10 is stored as voice data other than the reach voice data. As described above, the other voice data 222a10 includes voice data for reproducing the voice output when a predetermined character image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a light emission effect on the third symbol display device 81. It includes audio data for playing audio that is output when an image is displayed.

Next, the details of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (c). FIG. 9C is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 hold ball number counter 223a, a special figure 2 hold ball number counter 223b, a reach voice reproduction counter 223c, a reproduction voice data storage area 223d, a probability variation time reduction flag 223e, a first through gate passage flag 223f, and a second. It has at least a through gate passing flag 223g, a first through gate passing time counter 223h, a second through gate passing time counter 223i, a first through gate passing ball number counter 223j, and a second through gate passing ball number counter 223k. There is.

The special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, like the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, is the first symbol display device 37 (and the third) with the start winning prize to the first ball entry port 64. It is a fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting number of times) of the variation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

The special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110, is the first symbol display device 37 (and the third) with the start winning prize to the second entry port 640. It is a variable effect performed by the symbol display device 81), and is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Unable to get the value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls that have won in the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640, respectively, based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and holds the special figure 1. The ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b manage the number of these reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is added by the start winning to the first ball entry port 64, and the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is added in the main control device 110. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is added. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entry opening 64 held in the main control device 110) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a in FIG. 1 (S2007 in FIG. 24). reference).

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is added by the start winning to the second entry port 640 and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is added in the main control device 110. When the special figure 2 holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the special figure 2 holding ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entry opening 640 held in the main control device 110) is stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2010 in FIG. 24).

On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted in the main control device 110. Is received, and when the mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, is the variation effect associated with the start winning prize to the first ball entry port 64 or to the second ball entry port 640? The value of either the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 depending on whether it is due to the start winning (see S2108 and S2109 in FIG. 25). Whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning of the first ball opening 64 or the starting winning of the second entry port 640 depends on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110. The information indicating that is included, and the judgment is made based on that information.

In this way, the values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special figure 1 reserved ball number of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

The values of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the special figure 1 holding ball number command or the special figure 2 holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the holding ball number indicated by the command to the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special figure. 2 Stored or updated at the timing of storing in the reserved ball counter 223b or updating the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball counter 223b in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the sum of the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after the above is performed, a display reserved ball number command is issued. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S2008 in FIG. 24 and S2110 in FIG. 25).

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the hold display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. , Its value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number symbol of the third symbol display device 81 is also set to the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The reach audio reproducing counter 223c is a counter that counts the reach audio being reproduced (outputting from the audio output device 226). The reach audio reproduction counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223, which is executed when the power is turned on. Then, when a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment (probability change reach establishment or normal reach establishment) is received from the display control device 114, the MPU221 uses the MPU 221 to reach the reach corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) included in the reach display command. The voice is read from the voice data storage area 222a and played back, and 1 is added to the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c (see S2304 in FIG. 29).

When the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes "2", it means that two reach voices are being reproduced. The two reach voices are being reproduced when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 first establishes a probabilistic reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to send a reach display command to notify the establishment of reach together with the type of reach, and then immediately send a reach display command to notify the establishment of reach together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach. There is. Further, these two reach display commands are continuously transmitted, and between the two reach display commands, other display commands (commands indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81, other than the reach display command). Command) is configured not to be sent.

On the other hand, when the MPU 221 receives each command from the display control device 113, the MPU 221 immediately reads the voice data corresponding to the display content indicated by the command from the voice data storage area 222a, and reproduces the voice. It is output from the audio output device 226.

That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 first outputs the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then outputs the probabilistic reach voice. Immediately, the normal reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) for which the normal reach is established is output. Therefore, in this case, first, the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "1" when the probabilistic reach voice is output, and then the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" when the normal reach voice is output. Become.

Here, as described above, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device gives a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device. When a command notifying "normal reach is established" is received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played is two, the reach voice played most recently, that is, the normal reach voice that started playing later. Stop playback.

As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are once played back, but the normal reach voice is immediately stopped playing. , Only the probabilistic reach voice will be played to the end. Here, as described with reference to FIG. 9B, the normal reach voice has a silent section for the first 20 milliseconds. Therefore, even if the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started once, the reproduction of the normal reach sound is stopped during the reproduction of the silent section. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then the reach display command is transmitted. Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. In the voice lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, the reach display command is transmitted. Playback of the two reach voices is started in sequence. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the two reach voices are being reproduced, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach voice (the reach voice which started the reproduction later) which started the most recently. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is a probabilistic reach or a normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed in, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing the increase in the processing load, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

The reach voice playing counter 223c stops playing the most recently played reach voice (normal reach voice that started playing later) because the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2". It is initialized to "0" according to. Further, the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is initialized to "0" even when a display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113.

The reproduced audio data storage area 223d is an area for storing audio data for reproducing the audio output from the audio output device 226. The MPU 221 generates an audio signal while decoding the audio data stored in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and outputs the generated audio signal to the audio output device 226, whereby the audio is output from the audio output device 226. , Will be played.

Here, the voice lamp control device 113 has four voice reproduction channels, and is configured to be able to reproduce four voice data at the same time. The reproduced audio data storage area 223d is provided with an area for storing audio data to be reproduced on the audio reproduction channel for each of the four audio reproduction channels. That is, the first channel area 223d1 for storing the audio data to be reproduced in the first audio reproduction channel, the second channel area 223d2 for storing the audio data to be reproduced in the second audio reproduction channel, and the like. The third channel area 223d3 for storing the audio data to be reproduced on the third audio reproduction channel and the fourth channel area 223d4 for storing the audio data to be reproduced on the fourth audio reproduction channel are reproduced. It is provided in the voice data storage area 223d.

Based on the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command received from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 reads the voice data corresponding to the display content from the voice data storage area 222a of the ROM 222. The read audio data is stored in any of the empty areas of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the reproduction audio data storage area 223d.

The MPU 221 decodes the audio data stored in the corresponding first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 for each of the first to fourth audio reproduction channels, and generates an audio signal. Then, after mixing the audio signals generated for each audio reproduction channel, the audio signals are output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be reproduced at the same time and output from the audio output device 226.

The probability change time reduction flag 223e is a flag indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change or the time reduction. When the probabilistic time reduction flag 223e is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is during probabilistic change or time reduction, and when it is off, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, neither probable change nor time reduction. Show that.

The probability change time reduction flag 223e is the third when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a confirmation command (a command for confirming and displaying the stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the variation effect) from the main control device 110. The update is performed based on the result confirmed and displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see S2021 in FIG. 24).

Specifically, when the symbol of the probabilistic jackpot (15R probabilistic jackpot or 4R probabilistic jackpot) is definitely displayed, the subsequent gaming state is in the probable change, so the probabilistic change time reduction flag 223e is set to ON. In addition, when the symbol of the normal jackpot (15R normal jackpot) is confirmed and displayed, the game state is in the time saving until the variation effect is performed 100 times after that, so the probability variation time saving flag 223e is set to ON. do. In addition, when the game state is in the short time, it is judged whether or not the variable effect is performed 100 times after the normal big hit is performed every time the definite display of the out-of-order symbol is performed, and the variable effect is performed 100 times. If it is determined, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, so the probability variation time saving flag 223e is set to off.

The probability change time reduction flag 223e is used to control so-called "right-handed" or "left-handed" to the player via the third symbol display device 81 according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entry opening 640 is a high probability state even in a low probability state. However, although it is the same, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that when the ball enters the second entry port 640, the ball goes to the first entry opening 64. Is set higher than when the ball enters. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, when the game state is normal, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in the closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that there is no electric accessory. A ball is fired toward the first entry port 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and a big hit lottery is made by entering the first entry port 64. It is advantageous for the player to get many chances and aim to be a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

However, some players do not know that, as a specification of the pachinko machine 10, the method of firing a ball must be changed between "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the game state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the hitting direction instruction screens 811, 812 for instructing the player to “hit left” or “hit right” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the hitting direction instruction screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 10 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “hit left”, and FIG. 10 (b) shows “right hit” to the player. It is a schematic diagram which shows schematically the hitting direction instruction screen which instructes.

As shown in FIG. 10A, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "hit left" is "← hit to the left !!" on the lower left side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81. This is the screen on which the symbol 811 is displayed. Since the symbol 811 includes an arrow pointing to the left and the symbol 811 is arranged on the left side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "left strike" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner to shoot the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to “hit right” is displayed on the lower right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, “hit right !! → This is the screen on which the symbol 812 is displayed. Since the symbol 812 includes an arrow pointing to the right and the symbol 812 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed" is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner to shoot the ball so that the ball passes to the right side of the variable display device 80 provided with the third symbol display device 81.

From the probability change time reduction flag 223e, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the player may be left-handed when the game state is during the probability change or the time reduction. Then, if there is a possibility that the player is hitting the left side, the right-handed hitting is more likely to be a 15R probability change jackpot during the probability change or the time reduction, which is advantageous for the player. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to display the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" (S2216 in FIG. 27). By receiving this right-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be directed to "hit the ball" to "right-hand", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 determines from the probability change time reduction flag 223e whether or not the player may be right-handed when the game state is normal. And, if there is a possibility that the player is hitting right, it is easy to surely get a start prize by the first entrance 64 during normal times, and many chances of a big hit lottery can be obtained, so left hit. Is more advantageous for the player, so a left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "left-handed" (Fig. 26 S2208). By receiving this left-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "left-handed" shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be directed to "hit the ball to the left", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

Returning to FIG. 9 (c), the description will be continued. The first through gate passage flag 223f is a flag indicating that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. The second through gate passage flag 223g is a flag indicating that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670. The first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g both indicate that the ball has passed through the first through-gate 67 or the second through-gate 670 when both are on, and when off, the first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g. 1 Indicates that the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 or the second through gate 670.

Both the first through-gate passing flag 223f and the second through-gate passing flag 223g are set to off as initial values in the initial value setting process of RAM 223 (see S1810 in FIG. 22) executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first through gate passage command for notifying that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67, which is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, The MPU 221 sets the first through gate passage flag 223f to ON. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second through gate passage command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command. The MPU 221 sets the second through gate passage flag 223g to ON.

Here, the first through gate passage command is a command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice amplifier control device 113 when the passage of the sphere of the first through gate 67 is detected in the main control device 110. .. Further, the second through gate passage command is a command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice amplifier control device 113 when the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670 is detected in the main control device 110.

The details will be described later with reference to the free chart of FIG. 26, but the MPU 221 performs a right-handed left-handed determination process. In this right-handed left-handed determination process, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is normal, the on / off state of the second through gate passage flag 223 g is observed, and the second through gate 670 is reached within 10 seconds. When it is detected that three balls have passed, it is determined that the player is "right-handed" even though the player is in the normal state, and the ball is instructed to "left-handed" in the player's advantage during the normal time. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change or the time reduction, three balls are thrown at the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds by observing the on / off state of the first through gate passing flag 223f. When it detects that the ball has passed, it is determined that the player is "left-handed" even though the player is in the probable change or the time reduction, and the player is instructed to "right-hand" in favor of the player during the probable change or the time reduction. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the hitting direction instruction screen to be hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for a player to hit right, the player can hit left only by passing one ball through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There was one that judged that it was doing and gave a notification instructing "right-handed". However, even if the player is right-handed, it is quite possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the game board, and the balls are on the left side of the game board. It is quite possible to pass through the through gate. It is bothersome for the player to be instructed to "hit right" each time. Further, even if the player is hitting to the left, if a notification instructing "right-handing" is given every time a ball passes through the through gate, the notification will occur frequently. After all it makes the player feel annoying.

On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is normally performed by detecting that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 within 10 seconds. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing the player to “left-handed”. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change or the time reduction, the game is played in the probable change or the time reduction by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" which is advantageous to the person. As a result, even though the player is firing the ball in an advantageous direction, some of the balls are launched in a direction different from the advantageous direction, so that a screen instructing the hitting direction is displayed one by one. It can be suppressed from being done. Further, even if the player shoots the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being hindered by the screen instructing the direction of hitting the ball.

The first through-gate passage flag 223f and the second through-gate passage flag 223g are each set to off at the stage of ending the right-handed left-handed determination process executed by the MPU 221.

The time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is a counter for counting the elapsed time since the sphere passed through the first through gate 67. The time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is a counter for counting the elapsed time since the sphere passed through the second through gate 670. The first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. The second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is a counter that counts the number of balls that have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds.

The time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, the second through gate elapsed time counter 223i, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j, and the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k are all RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. In the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22), 0 is set as the initial value. When the value of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate are 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0, the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is probablely changing or the time is shortened. When this is detected, 1 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and 1 is set in the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223j. Further, when the value of the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is 0, it is detected that the second through gate passage flag 223g is turned on and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 while the game state is normal. Then, 1 is set in the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate, and 1 is set in the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k.

The first through gate passing ball number counter 223j still detects that the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is probablely changing or the time is shortened. And 1 is added. Further, the second through gate passing ball number counter 223j is incremented by 1 when it is detected that the second through gate passing flag 223g is turned on and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 while the gaming state is normal. NS.

The counter update process executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond when the value of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate becomes a number other than 0 (FIG. 23). In S1912), the update process of adding 1 is performed. Then, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate are set to 0 again when the value reaches 10000, and the value is maintained at 0 thereafter. Further, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is set to 0 when the time counter 22h after passing through the first through gate is set to 0. Similarly, the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is set to 0 when the time counter 22i after passing through the second through gate is set to 0.

As a result, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate will have 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when the ball enters the first through gate 67 while the gaming state is probable changing or the time is shortened and the value is 0. The number of balls that have passed through the first through gate 67 is counted by the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j during that 10 seconds. Further, the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate counts 10,000 milliseconds (10 seconds) when the ball enters the second through gate 670 while the game state is normal and the value is 0. During that 10 seconds, the number of balls that have passed through the second through gate 670 is counted by the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k.

Then, when the value of the first through gate passing ball counter 223j is "2" while the gaming state is probable changing or the time is shortened, the first through gate passing flag 223f is turned on and the ball passes through the first through gate 67. When it is detected that the ball has passed, it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is "left-handed" even though the player is in the probable change or the time reduction, and the hit ball instructing the player to "right-hand" in the probable change or the time reduction. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the direction instruction screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can perform "right-handed" which is advantageous for the player during the probability change or the time reduction. Can be directed to.

In addition, "0" is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and "0" is set in the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j in accordance with the transmission of the right-handed instruction screen display command.

Further, when the game state is normal and the value of the second through gate passing ball counter 223k is "2", the second through gate passing flag 223k is turned on and the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. Is detected, it means that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 in 10 seconds. Therefore, in this case, it is determined that the player is "right-handed" even though the player is in the normal state, and the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to "left-handed" in the normal state is displayed. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. As a result, the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "left-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player is directed to perform "left-handed" which is advantageous for the player during normal times. Can be done.

In addition, "0" is set in the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate, and "0" is set in the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k in accordance with the transmission of the left-handed instruction screen display command.

The RAM 223 also has a main control command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed, and a display received by the display control device 114. Display control command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, fluctuation start flag (not shown) that indicates that the fluctuation effect should be started in the ON state, etc. have.

Both the main control command storage area and the display control command storage area are composed of ring buffers, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the main command determination process (see FIG. 24) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the main control command storage area is read out, and the main command is read. The judgment process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

Further, when the voice reproduction setting process (see FIG. 29) is executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the display command stored first among the unprocessed display commands stored in the display control command storage area is read. The voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the display command is read from the voice data storage area 222a provided in the ROM 222 by the voice reproduction setting process, and the read voice data is reproduced. The process of storing the data in the free channel area (any of the first to fourth channel areas) of the data storage area 223d is performed. As a result, the sound matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be output from the sound output device 81.

The fluctuation start flag is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 24). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S2102 in FIG. 25).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the like is performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226 are combined. be able to. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 19).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 237, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 issues a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Along with receiving from 113, a display command for notifying the display content actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

The input / output port 238 is also connected to the MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. Further, the ROM 232 has at least a display data table storage area 232a.

The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which the display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on the command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table is an area in which a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time is stored in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the effect. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the display data table.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, a variable effect, a demo effect, and the like. A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

The demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The confirmation display effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is a display effect. For example, if the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect that emphasizes the miss is performed, and if the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 4R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

The restart effect is when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol due to the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of displaying an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect and the restart effect is stored. The variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared one by one according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol to be set. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the definite display effect, a definite display of a missed symbol as a stop symbol, a definite display of a probabilistic jackpot (15R probabilistic jackpot or a 4R probabilistic jackpot), and a normal jackpot (15R normal). There are also those that confirm the jackpot).

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character and a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are obtained with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage (either "sea stage", "palace stage", or "deep sea stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Information is described that specifies whether to display a rear image different from the rear images A to C. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. .. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead of this, the back type and which state is corresponding to the back type. Display state information indicating whether the rear image should be displayed may be specified. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, hue, etc. changing over time. This display state information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the initial state. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image based on this display data table (or displaying the image based on this display data table on the third symbol display device 81). You may. In this case, the MPU 231 has started drawing an image (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table. Based on the state of the rear image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or displaying the image on the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the display state information. Identify.

Further, the display state information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table), depending on the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the third symbol display device 81), and the type information of the display state information (display on the display state information) together with the back type and display state information. For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table). Information) indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time from the start of the display) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the display state information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In the present embodiment, each of the third symbols is given a unique identification number for identifying each of them. For example, the main symbol of "0" is assigned "0" as an identification number, and the sub symbol between "0" and "1" is assigned an identification number of "1", and the main symbol of "1" is attached. "2" is attached to the symbol as an identification number, and "3" is attached to the sub-design between "1" and "2" as an identification number. In this way, the sub-symbols are also given different identification numbers depending on the position (between which main symbols) in which the sub-symbols are inserted.

Further, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly specified, but the stop of the variation effect performed immediately before. Offset information with the identification number of the symbol is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to each third symbol.

The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. From the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to the address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before. Describe the difference (offset information) from the identification information of. As a result, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

It should be noted that, as the symbol type information, the third symbol has a high speed during the predetermined time during which the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is switched to the identification number itself of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set to be a variable display time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified at some addresses. For example, when displaying high-speed fluctuations, the display content is defined as "high-speed fluctuation display", and when displaying a mermaid character image, the display content is defined as "mermaid character display", and a light emission effect image is displayed. If it is to be displayed, it is defined as "light emission effect display" as the display content.

When displaying the establishment of the probabilistic reach, "probability change reach establishment" is specified together with the type of the main symbol that established the probabilistic reach as the display content. When displaying the establishment of normal reach, "normal reach establishment" is specified as the display content together with the type of the main symbol that established the normal reach. In addition, when displaying double reach, both probabilistic reach and normal reach are established, so first, as the display content, "probability variation reach is established" is specified together with the type of main symbol that established probabilistic reach. In addition, "normal reach is established" is defined together with the type of main symbol that has established normal reach.

The display content defined in this display data table is used to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 15). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233a provided in the work RAM 233, which will be described later, and the pointer 233b is initialized. Then, the pointer 233b is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the pointer is then added. The image contents to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233b, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command indicating the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to output the voice corresponding to the display content notified by this display command from the voice output device 226.

When a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command indicating the display contents is generated in order from the display contents specified earlier, and the display command is used as a voice lamp control device. Send to 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, the probability variation reach is first established as the display content at the address at the timing when the establishment of the double reach is displayed in the display data table. "Probability change reach is established" is defined together with the type of the main symbol, and then "normal reach is established" is defined together with the type of the main symbol for which the normal reach is established. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then immediately performs the normal reach. It is configured to send a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the established reach symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, a pointer 233b, a drawing list area 233c, and a timekeeping counter 233d.

The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233b by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the display content is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, a display command indicating the display content is generated according to the display content, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to output the voice corresponding to the display content notified by this display command from the voice output device 226.

The pointer 233b is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing content should be acquired from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233b to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 32 (a). ) In (see S2603), the value of the pointer 233b is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233b is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and specifies a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 13) is created. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

The drawing list area 233c is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 13, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes an address in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the image controller 237 describes a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area specified by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 is a character. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and semi-transparency according to the semi-transparent value. Processing was performed, synthesis processing with other sprites was performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing was performed according to the color information, and filtering processing was performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the sprite (display object) data is generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. NS. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately sets the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And that information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Characters (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Returning to FIG. 11, the description will be continued. The timekeeping counter 233d is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 32 (b). )), The clock counter 233d is decremented by 1 each time the display setting process (S2603) is executed. As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233d becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes to be performed.

The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, the above image data is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of a frame buffer area for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 236 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes it in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and also writes the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed format image data) of the sprite defined in the drawing list from the character storage area 235a according to the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. Processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written to one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

Writing one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and reading one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, both of which are completed in 20 milliseconds. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from the one frame buffer area is subsequently read, and the other is in the meantime. Image data for the next frame is written to the frame buffer area of.

In this way, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 21. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In the timer interrupt processing, first, the reading processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

Further, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899,99,99,250), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first input is performed. The start winning process associated with winning the ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640 is executed (S1105). Further, a through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is executed (S1106). The details of the variation processing, the start winning processing, and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 16, 15, and 18, respectively.

After the through gate passage process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1107), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1108) to end the timer interrupt process. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, and starts. When a prize is won, the holding process of the value indicated by various random number counters and the counting process of the number of held balls are executed.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1201). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S1201: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (variation effect accompanying the starting winning to the first ball opening 64). It is determined whether or not the reserved ball number NA) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1202). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1201: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, a variable effect is produced due to the start winning in the first ball opening 64. If the number of reserved balls is not NA <4 (S1202: No), the process proceeds to S1206.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls in the variable effect due to the start winning in the first ball opening 64 is NA <4 (S1202: Yes). , Special figure 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203d (reserved ball number NA) is added by 1 (S1203), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first free holding area of the special drawing 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S1204).

Next, a special figure 1 hold ball number command including the value of the hold ball number NA of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entry port 64, which was updated by the process of S1203, was set (S1205), and S1206 Move to processing. This special figure 1 reserved ball count command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the hold ball number NA of the variable effect accompanying the winning of the first ball opening 64 included in the special figure 1 hold ball number command. Manage numbers.

In the subsequent processing of S11206, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second entrance 640 (S1206). Here, the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S1206: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second ball opening 640). It is determined whether or not the reserved ball number NB) is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1207). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the second ball opening 640 (S1206: No), or even if there is a prize in the second ball opening 640, a variable effect is produced due to the start winning in the second ball opening 640. If the number of reserved balls is not NB <4 (S1207: No), the start winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second entrance 640 (S1206: Yes) and the number of reserved balls for the variable effect accompanying the start winning in the second entrance 640 is NB <4 (S1207: Yes). , Special figure 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 203 (reserved ball number NB) is added by 1 (S1208), and further, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter. Each value of CS1 is stored in the first free holding area of the special drawing 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S1209).

Next, a special figure 2 hold ball number command including the value of the hold ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the start prize to the second entry opening 640 updated by the process of S1208 is set (S1210), and the start prize is set. Ends the process and returns to the timer interrupt process. This special figure 2 hold ball number command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1601 of the main process (FIG. 20). In the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball in the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the hold ball number NB of the variable effect accompanying the winning of the second entry port 640 included in the special figure 2 hold ball number command. Manage numbers.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the variation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This variation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 1X4), and controls the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1301). The big hit includes the middle of the big hit game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B at the time of the big hit, and the middle of the predetermined time after the big hit game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1301: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302), and the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B changes. If it is not in the middle (S1302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is stopped (S1303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1303: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1303: Yes), it means that the fluctuation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) can be started. First, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls NB of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entry opening 640) is larger than 0 (S1304). As a result, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding ball number NB) is larger than 0 (S1304: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding ball number NB). ) Is subtracted by 1 (S1305), and the data stored in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S1306).

This data shift process shifts the data (counter values) stored in the special figure 2 hold first area of the special figure 2 hold ball storage area 203b to the special figure hold ball execution area 203c, and also shifts the special figure 2 to the special figure 2 hold ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 2 hold 1st area, Special figure 2 hold 3rd area → Special figure 2 hold 2nd area, Special figure 2 hold 4th area → Special figure 2 hold 3rd area, etc. It shifts the data (counter value) in the area.

After the data shift processing, the special symbol type flag 203k is set to ON (S1307), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the second entrance 640. After indicating that the data is to be executed, the fluctuation start processing (S1308) in the first symbol display device 37B is executed, and this processing is terminated. The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

As a result of the processing of S1304, the value (holding ball number NB) of the special figure 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not larger than 0, that is, the holding ball number NB is 0, and the start winning prize to the second entrance 640. When it is determined that there is no reserved variable effect due to (S1304: No), then the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the reserved ball of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first entry port 64). It is determined whether or not the number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309).

As a result, the value (holding ball number NA) of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not larger than 0, that is, the holding ball number NA is 0, and the holding due to the start winning to the first ball opening 64 is held. When it is determined that there is no variation effect (S1309: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) is larger than 0 (S1309: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 holding ball number counter 203d (holding ball number NA) Is subtracted by 1 (S1310), and the data stored in the special figure 1 reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S1311).

This data shift process shifts the data (counter values) stored in the special figure 1 hold first area of the special figure 1 hold ball storage area 203a to the special figure hold ball execution area 203c, and also shifts the special figure 1 to the special figure 1 hold ball execution area 203c. Hold 2nd area → Special figure 1 hold 1st area, Special figure 1 hold 3rd area → Special figure 1 hold 2nd area, Special figure 1 hold 4th area → Special figure 1 hold 3rd area, etc. It shifts the data (counter value) in the area.

After the data shift processing, the special symbol type flag 203k is set to off (S1312), and the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started from now on is accompanied by the start winning to the first ball opening 64. After indicating that it is to be executed, the process proceeds to the process of S1308, the variation start process in the first symbol display device 37A is executed, and this process is terminated.

In this variation processing, when the variation effect can be started (S1303: Yes), first, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e in FIG. 2 is larger than 0 (S1304). ), When the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0, that is, when the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entrance 640 is suspended (S1304: Yes), the special figure 2 1 Regardless of the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d, that is, regardless of whether or not the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entry port 64 is suspended, it is reserved in the special figure 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The fluctuation effect is started based on the collected data (counter values). As a result, the starting prize at the second entrance 640 is prioritized over the starting prize at the first entrance 64, and the jackpot lottery is performed, and the variable effect is performed based on the jackpot lottery. There is.

In the process of S1302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S1302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1313). The display time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B during fluctuation is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If it has not elapsed (S1313: No), the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is updated (S1314), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, among the LED 37Ab of the first symbol display device 37A or the LED 37Bb of the first symbol display device 37B, for example, the currently lit LED is red from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses. If there is, turn off the red LED and turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and the blue LED is on. Then, a display mode is set in which the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B has elapsed (S1313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbols of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is set (S1315). The stop symbol is set in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1308) described later with reference to FIG.

That is, by the processing of S1308, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type counter. Depending on the value of C2, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 4R probability variation jackpot (a probability variation state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variable jackpot to be transferred) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, a blue LED is turned on when a 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after a big hit, a red LED is turned on when a 4R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a red LED and blue are turned on when a 15R normal jackpot is reached. LED and turn on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B corresponding to the stop symbols is set in the process of S1315, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is set to the LED in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. A confirmation command is set (S1316) to confirm in synchronization with lighting, and this process ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the fluctuation start processing (S1308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S1308). This fluctuation start processing (S1308) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 16) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. A "big hit" or "missing" lottery (big hit lottery) is performed, and an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, a big hit lottery process for determining whether or not a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c is performed (S1401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (that is, during normal medium and time saving), "7,307,582" associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. Is the jackpot random number value, and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (that is, during probabilistic change), "28,58,85" associated with the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a. , 122, 144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420,448,486,506,543,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,836 , 866, 892 ”is the jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. Determine.

Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the processing of S1401 (S1401: Yes), in order to set the display mode at the time of the jackpot, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type flag is on (S1402). .. When the special symbol type flag is on (S1402: Yes), the variation effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is executed in association with the start winning to the second entrance 640. As the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the "second entrance" (see FIG. 8B) is set (S1403).

On the other hand, when the special symbol type flag is off (S1402: No), the variable effect of the first symbol (third symbol) to be started is executed in association with the start winning to the first entrance 64. As the jackpot type table 202b for determining the jackpot type, a jackpot type table for the "first entrance" (see FIG. 8B) is set (S1404).

Then, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the special figure reserved ball execution area 203c, and the jackpot type is determined. The display mode at the time of the corresponding big hit is set (S1405).

That is, the jackpot type selected by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table set by the processing of S1403 or S1404, that is, the 15R probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds. The first entry is based on whether the maximum number of rounds is a 4R probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds, or a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. In the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the ball opening 64, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37Ab) of the first symbol display device 37A is set, and in the case of the variable effect accompanying the starting winning to the second ball opening 640. , The display mode (lighting state of the LED 37Bb) of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is stopped and displayed in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as.

Here, when a big hit is made due to winning the first ball entrance 64, the big hit type is 1/4 according to the big hit type table for the "first ball opening" (see FIG. 8B). The probability of (= 25/100) is a 15R probability variation jackpot, the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is a 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/2 (= 50/100) is a 4R probability variation jackpot.

On the other hand, if a big hit is made due to winning the second ball entrance 640, the big hit type is halved according to the big hit type table for the "second ball opening" (see FIG. 8 (b)). The probability of (= 50/100) is a 15R probability variation jackpot, the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is a 15R normal jackpot, and the probability of 1/4 (= 25/100) is a 4R probability variation jackpot.

In this way, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that the ball enters the first entry port 64 when the ball enters the second entry opening 640. It is set higher than when it hits a ball. On the other hand, as described above, the electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entry port 640, and it is easy for the ball to enter the second entry port 640 according to the open / closed state of the electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of big hit is determined (S1406). The determination of this fluctuation pattern is based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, time-saving, medium / probability change), the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c (see FIG. 8C). It is done based on. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set in the case of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entry slot 64, and the second entry slot 640 is set. In the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

If it is determined by the process of S1401 that it is not a big hit (S1401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1407). In the process of S1307, in the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entry port 64, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A is displayed, and the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second ball entry port 640 is displayed. In this case, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37B is set to the display mode corresponding to the out-of-order symbol, and the third is based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the special figure holding ball execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1408). The determination of this fluctuation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal, time saving, medium / probability change), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the fluctuation pattern for deviation. It is performed based on the table 202d (displacement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1, deviation (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d2). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37A is set in the case of the variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first entry slot 64, and the second entry slot 640 is set. In the case of the variable effect accompanying the start winning, the display time of the first symbol display device 37B is set.

When the processing of S1406 or the processing of S1408 is completed, the variation pattern type determined by the processing of S1406 or S1408 is set to the special figure 1 (variation effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball opening 64) or the special figure 2 ( A variation pattern command to be notified to the display control device 114 is set (S1409), including special figure type information indicating whether or not it is a variation effect accompanying a start winning to the second entry port 640 (S1409).

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1405 or S1407 is set (S1410). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21). NS.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S1106). The through gate passage process (S1106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), determines whether the ball has passed through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4. Further, in the through-gate passage processing, the first through-gate passage command and the second through-gate passage command for notifying the passage of the sphere in the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Perform the processing for.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501). Here, it is detected that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes), the first through gate notifies the voice lamp control device 113 that the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67. Set the pass command (S1502). The first through-gate passage command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

Next, the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved balls M of the fluctuation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S1503).

Whether the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67 (S1501: No), or even if the sphere has passed through the first through gate 67, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1506. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first through gate 67 (S1501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1503: Yes), the normal figure reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S1504). Then, it is acquired from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203 of the random number counter C4 per second, and stored in the first area of the empty hold area (the first to fourth areas of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i. (S1505), the process proceeds to S1506.

In the process of S1505, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203f after addition to S1504 is referred to, and if the value is 1, the first area of the normal symbol hold is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area for holding the normal figure, if the value is 3, the third area for holding the normal figure, and if the value is 4, the fourth area for holding the normal figure is first. Area.

In the process of S1506, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506). Here, it is detected that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670 over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: Yes), the second through gate notifies the voice lamp control device 113 that the sphere has passed through the second through gate 67. Set the pass command (S1507). The second through-gate passage command is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 21).

Next, the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved balls M of the fluctuation display of the second symbol) is acquired, and the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S1508).

Whether the ball has passed through the second through gate 670 (S1506: No), or even if the ball has passed through the second through gate 670, the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4. If not (S1508: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second through gate 670 (S1508: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1508: Yes), the normal figure reserved ball number counter The value (M) of 203f is added by 1 (S1509). Then, it is acquired from the counter buffer of the value RAM 203 of the random number counter C4 per second, and stored in the first area of the empty hold area (the first to fourth areas of the normal figure hold) of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203i. (S1510), this process is terminated.

In the processing of S1510, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203f after addition to S1509 is referred to, and if the value is 1, the first area of the normal symbol holding is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area for holding the normal figure, if the value is 3, the third area for holding the normal figure, and if the value is 4, the fourth area for holding the normal figure is first. Area.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, it is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU201 in the main control unit 110. The NMI interrupt process is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1551) as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is also shifted to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S1611 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. 21, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is also executed when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1605: Yes). S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, it shifts to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701).

Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls is corresponded to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 hold ball number command and the special figure 2 hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, by this external output processing, the fluctuation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command necessary for the fluctuation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, and the opening / closing operation of the large opening 65a in the special gaming state at the time of a big hit are performed. When this is done, commands and the like necessary for displaying various screens on the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the movement type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, when the special gaming state at the time of a big hit is reached, the large opening 65a In accordance with the opening / closing operation (closing condition) of the above, the large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704).

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (ordinary symbol, for example, the symbol of “◯” or “×”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, when the value of the random number counter C4 per second is held in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203i as the ball passes through the second entry port (through gate) 267. The value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding first area of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203i is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j. At this time, each hold is such that the second area for holding the normal figure → the first area for holding the normal figure, the third area for holding the normal figure → the second area for holding the normal figure, the fourth area for holding the normal figure → the third area for holding the normal figure, and so on. The value of the second random number counter in the area is also shifted.

Then, a lottery (winning lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j matches the winning random number value, and the case matches the winning random number value. As a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol), after performing the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed, and after the stop display of the symbol of "○" is displayed. , The electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened for a predetermined time. On the other hand, as a result of the winning lottery, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203j does not match the winning random number value, it is regarded as a deviation from the second symbol (ordinary symbol). 2 After the variable display of the second symbol is performed by the symbol display device 83, the symbol of "x" is stopped and displayed. In this case, the electric accessory 640a is left in the closed state.

It should be noted that a different number is set as the winning random number value depending on whether the game state is normal, time saving, or probabilistic change. That is, the number of random numbers that are hit during the normal game state is 149, and the value is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined to be a hit when the gaming state is normal. On the other hand, the number of hit random numbers in the game state during the time reduction or the probability change is 250, and the range is "1 to 250". That is, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "1-250", it is determined that the game is a hit if the game state is during the time reduction or the probability change.

Further, the fluctuation time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set shorter when the gaming state is during the time reduction or during the probability change than when the game state is during the normal state. Further, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when it is determined to be a hit of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is opened for a longer time when the gaming state is during the time reduction or during the probability change than when it is during the normal state.

As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is set higher during the probabilistic change and during the time reduction than during the normal period. Further, as described above, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter than that in the normal state, the symbol "○" is easily displayed in the variable display of the second symbol, and the electric accessory 640a is in the open state ( The number of times it becomes an enlarged state) increases. On the other hand, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal time. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, as described above, the probability of a big hit between the case where the ball enters the first entry port 64 and the case where the ball enters the second entry opening 640 is a low probability state. It is the same even in the high probability state, but the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when it becomes a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second entry slot 640. It is set higher than when the ball enters 64. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can always enter the ball.

Therefore, in the normal state, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entry port 640, so that the first entry without the electric accessory is available. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and there are many opportunities for a big hit lottery by entering the first ball entrance 64. It is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit. On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, the electric accessory attached to the second entry port 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to enter the second entry port 640. A person who shoots a ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and aims to become a 15R probability variable jackpot by entering the second entrance 640. However, it is advantageous for the player.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probable change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

After the processing of S1705, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701 and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the process of S1706, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 19 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1712), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 22, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1920 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 23). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 23, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 23), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1920. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1920 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1920 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

On the other hand, if the power off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure, and the voice lamp control is performed during the execution of the power off process of S1820. The MPU 221 of the device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806), and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1806). Move to processing. By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1920 is executed (see S1919 in FIG. 23). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1920 is executed, the process of S1920 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1920 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S1811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the processing of S1808 is performed via the processing of S1804 to S1806. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the clear processing of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the processing is shifted to S1810, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clear processing of S1809 is that when the processing of S1808 is reached from S1804 via the processing of S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1804. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S1901: No), the process of S1902 to S1912 is not performed and the process proceeds to S1913.

In the process of S1901, it is the process related to the display (effect) that S1902 to S912 determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1913, the right-handed left-handed determination process of S1914, the main command determination process of S1915, and the audio reproduction setting process of S1916 in a short cycle.

By executing the main command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the audio reproduction setting process of S1916 in a short cycle, the reception omission of the display command transmitted from the display control device 114 is prevented, and the third display command is shown without delay based on the display command. Audio reproduction can be set according to the display content of the symbol display device 81.

By executing the variation display process of S1913 in a short cycle, the setting related to the variation effect can be performed without delay based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received by the main command determination process. Further, since the right-handed left-handed determination process of S1914 is executed in a short cycle, the player can use the first through-gate passage command and the second through-gate passage command received by the main command determination process without delay. The third symbol display device 81 can display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed" or "left-handed".

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1916 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1901: Yes). S1902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1909 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed (S1905). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

Further, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the stage is changed and the rear image of the display control device 114 is changed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. It may be changed to an effect that can be held, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the reach effects among a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1907 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1909), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1910). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the reproduced audio data storage area 223d is performed in the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) described later according to the display command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. The audio data stored in the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 are decoded, the decoded audio of all channels is mixed, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226. When the output of the alarm sound is set, the output pattern of the alarm sound is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is output from the voice output device 226.

After the process of S1910, the liquid crystal display effect execution management process is executed (S1911). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1909 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1910 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S1911, the counter update processing is executed (S1912), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1913. In the counter update process, various counters used by the MPU 221 are updated. For example, the update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is performed in the process of S1912. The update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is maintained at 0 when the value is 0, while it is 1 for the value when the value is 1 to 9999. Is added, and if the value is 10000, it is initialized to 0.

The time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is set to 1 when the first through gate passage command is received from the main control device 110, and the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is set to the second from the main control device 110. 1 is set when a through gate passage command is received. The counter update process executed every 1 millisecond updates the time counter 223h and the second through gate 223i after passing through the first through gate, so that the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are updated. It is possible to count the time from the passage of the sphere to the lapse of 10 seconds.

In the counter update process (S1912), the time counter 22h after passing through the first through gate is set to 0, and the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223j is set to 0. Similarly, the time counter 22i after passing through the second through gate is set to 0, and the counter for the number of balls passing through the second through gate, 223k, is set to 0.

In the process of S1913, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. Then, the variable display process, which is a process set to transmit these generated commands to the display control device 114, is executed. The details of this variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

After the variation display process, the right-handed left-handed determination process is executed (S1914). This right-handed left-handed determination process displays a hitting direction instruction screen instructing the player to right-handed when it is determined that the player is left-handed when the game state is shortened or during probable change. When it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and it is determined that the player is hitting right when the game state is normal, the third symbol screen for instructing the player to hit left is displayed. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81. The details of the right-handed left-handed determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

Next, the main command determination process for performing the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1915). The details of this main command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After the main command determination process, the audio reproduction setting process for setting the audio data matching the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d is executed according to the display command received from the display control device 114. (S1916). The audio data set in S1916 is decoded by the sound editing / output processing of S1910, and the sound is reproduced from the audio output device 226. The details of this audio reproduction setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

When the processing of S1916 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1917). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: Yes), both the power cutoff flag and the power cutoff processing flag are turned on (S1919), and the power cutoff process is executed (S1920). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1921), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. It also erases the memory of information on the occurrence of power failure.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1917 (S1917: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1918), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1918: No), the process returns to the process of S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the main command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this main command determination process (S1915). This main command determination process (S1915) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. Then, perform the processing corresponding to the received command. The details of the main command determination process will be described below.

In the main command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the main control command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is read from the main control device 110. Is determined (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the variation pattern type (various normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, short deviation, long) of the variation effect to be started from now on is obtained from the variation pattern command. (Out) is extracted (S2002), and further, it is shown whether the fluctuation effect is associated with the starting prize for the first ball opening 64 or the starting winning for the second ball opening 640. The special figure type information is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process.

The variation pattern type and the special figure type information extracted here are stored in the RAM 223. The variation pattern type is used when setting a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type in the variation display process (see FIG. 25) described later. .. Further, in the case of reducing the value of either the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 as the fluctuation effect is started in the fluctuation display processing of the special figure type information. See to.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S2004), and the stop type (15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 15R) indicated by the stop type command is set. Usually, a big hit, a complete off, a front-back off reach, and a reach other than the front-back off reach) are extracted and stored in the RAM 233 (S2005). Then, the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

By setting the variation start flag to on, the start of the variation effect is set, and the variation effect is started by the third symbol display device 81. Further, as for the stop type, in the variation display processing (see FIG. 25) described later, the stop symbol of the variation effect to be started is determined, and the stop symbol for displaying the stop symbol is notified in order to stop and display the determined stop symbol. Used when setting a type command.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 1 reserved ball number command (that is,). , The number of reserved balls of the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the first ball entry port 64 held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and this is transferred to the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. Store (S2007).

Then, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are totaled, and the totaled value is the number of fluctuation effects of the third symbol held in the main control device 110. The display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 is set (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the hold ball number symbol (● symbol) for the number of hold balls indicated by the display hold ball number command in the hold display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 reserved ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2009). ). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball number command has been received (S2009: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the special figure 2 reserved ball number command (that is,). , The number of reserved balls for the variable effect accompanying the start winning to the second entry port 640) held in the main control device 110), and this is transferred to the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. Store (S2010). Then, the process proceeds to S2008, and as described above, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added up, and the totaled value (total number of reserved balls). Is set for displaying the reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 (S2008), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 reserved ball count command has not been received (S2009: No), then it is determined whether or not the second through gate passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2011). .. Then, when it is determined that the second through gate passage command has been received (S2011: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the second entry port 640, so the second through gate passage flag 223g is set to ON. Then (S2012), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the second through gate passage command has not been received (S2011: No), it is then determined whether or not the first through gate passage command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2013). Then, when it is determined that the first through gate passage command has been received (S2013: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the first entry port 64, so the first through gate passage flag 223f is set to ON. Then (S2014), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the first through gate passage command has not been received (S2013: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2015). Then, when it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S2015: Yes), first, a display confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the third symbol is set (S2016). The display confirmation command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 confirms and displays the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 with the stop symbol notified in advance by the display stop type command.

After the processing of S2016, it is determined from the stop type extracted by the processing of S2005 and stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the stop symbol confirmed and displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is a probabilistic jackpot (S2017). Then, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot (S2017: Yes), 0 is set in the time reduction counter (not shown) (S2018). In the present embodiment, after the normal big hit, the game state is set to a short time while the variation effect is performed 100 times. The time reduction counter is for counting 100 fluctuation effects after a normal jackpot, and "100" is set when a normal jackpot is reached, and every time a deviation is confirmed and displayed in the subsequent fluctuation effects. Is subtracted by 1. Then, when the time reduction counter becomes 0, the game state is returned from the time reduction to the normal. If the normal jackpot is reached again during the time reduction, the number of fluctuation effects in which the time reduction state is continued is returned to 100 times by setting "100" again in the time reduction counter. Further, if a probable change jackpot occurs during the time reduction, the time reduction number counter is set to 0. In this case, the game state is in the probable change, and the probable change is maintained until the next big hit is established.

After the processing of S2018, the probability change time saving flag 223e is set to ON (S2021) to indicate that the gaming state is in the probability change. Then, the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

If, as a result of the processing of S2017, it is determined that the stop symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a probabilistic jackpot (S2017: No), then whether or not the stop symbol that is confirmed and displayed is a normal jackpot. Is determined (S2019). As a result, if it is a normal jackpot (S2019: Yes), 100 is set in the time reduction counter (S2020). As a result, 100 fluctuation effects are counted after the game state is changed to the time reduction, and when the deviation effect is repeated 100 times, the game state is changed from the time reduction to the normal time. After the processing of S2020, the probability variation time saving flag 223e is set to ON (S2021) to indicate that the gaming state is in the time saving. Then, the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

As a result of the processing of S2019, when it is determined that the stop symbol that is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not a normal jackpot (S2017: No), the stop symbol is an off symbol. Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter is larger than 0 (S2022), and if the time reduction counter is 0 (S2022: No), the main command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. .. On the other hand, when the time reduction counter is larger than 0 (S2022: Yes), the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (S2023), and it is determined whether or not the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (S2024).

As a result, when the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (S2023: Yes), after the game state is in the time reduction, the deviation effect is repeated 100 times, so the probability variation time reduction flag 223e is turned off. (S2025) to indicate that the gaming state is normal. Then, the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if the time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0 as a result of the processing of S2023 (S2023: No), the main command determination processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main processing. As a result, the gaming state is maintained during the time saving.

Further, when it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2015 (S2015: No), then it is determined whether or not another command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2026). If no other command has been received (S2026: No), the main command determination process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if another command is received (S2026: Yes), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2027), the main command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the variation display process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1913). This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and the generated display variation pattern command and display stop type command are generated. Is a process set to transmit to the control device 114.

In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command have not been received from the main controller 110. Ends the variable display process and returns to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then the fluctuation pattern command is used in the processing of S2102 in the main command determination processing (see FIG. 24). The variation pattern type (various normal reach, various super reach, various special reach, short deviation, long deviation) in the extracted variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2105. , Obtained from RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the details are based on the value of the counter for determining the detailed fluctuation pattern provided in the RAM 223, the value of the counter for determining the stop symbol, and the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103. The fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol are determined (S2104). Here, only the fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, but various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S2104 are defined. One variation pattern is selected from among them, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on. Further, as the stop type notified by the stop type command from the main control device 110, a rough stop type such as 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, complete deviation, front / rear deviation reach, and reach other than front / rear deviation is shown. By the processing of S2104, a stop symbol suitable for the stop type is determined.

When a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined detailed variation pattern is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set to send to (S2105). Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol determined by the process of S2104 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command to confirm and display the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command. indicate.

Next, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the reserved sphere as the reserved sphere is consumed (that is, the variable effect corresponding to the reserved sphere is set) in accordance with the setting of the variable pattern command for display. In order to reduce the number of reserved balls, first, from the special figure type information extracted in the processing of S2002, whether or not the variable effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning to the first ball entrance 64, that is, special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the fluctuation is due to (S2107), and if the fluctuation is due to the special figure 1 (S2107: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball count counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (S2108). On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2107, when it is determined that the variation effect to be started this time is associated with the start winning of the second entrance 640, that is, the variation according to the special figure 2 (S2107: No). , The value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 202b is subtracted by 1 (S2109).

Then, after the processing of S2108 or S2109, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the value of the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are added up, and the totaled value is held in the main control device 110. A display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 as the number of variation effects of the third symbol is set (S2110), the variation display process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process.

The display reserved ball number command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the display control device 114 displays the hold ball number symbol (● symbol) for the number of hold balls indicated by the display hold ball number command in the hold display area of the third symbol display device 81. Display on Db.

Next, a right-handed left-handed determination process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the right-handed left-handed determination process (S1914). This variation display process (S1913) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, when the gaming state is during the time reduction or the probability change. If it is determined that the player is hitting left, a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing the player to hit right is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the game state is normal, the game is played. When it is determined that the person is hitting right, this is a process of displaying the hitting direction instruction screen instructing the player to hit left in favor of the third symbol display device 81.

First, the right-handed left-handed determination process (S1914) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In the right-handed left-handed determination process (S1914), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (in the special gaming state) (S2201), and if the jackpot is in progress (S2201: Yes), the first through gate passage flag 223f and After resetting the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

That is, in the case of a big hit, the right-handed left-handed determination process is not performed. In the case of a big hit, regardless of whether the game state immediately before the big hit of the pachinko machine 10 is during probable change, short time, or normal, the variable effect that became a big hit is due to the start winning prize at the first entrance 64. Either the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes depending on whether it is due to the start winning to the second winning opening 640. do. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a or the specific winning opening 650a can indicate to the player in which direction the ball should be launched. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the right-handed left-handed determination is not performed and the present process is terminated.

However, in the case of a big hit, if the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 opens and closes, the specific winning opening of the first variable winning device 65 is determined when the player is determined to be right-handed. When the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen instructing 65a to hit left, which makes it easier for the ball to win, and the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 opens and closes, the player hits left. Even if the third symbol display device 81 displays a hitting direction instruction screen instructing the specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 to hit a right-handed ball when it is determined that the ball is easily won. good.

As a result of the processing of S2201, if it is not a big hit (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation time saving flag 223e is off (S2202). As a result, if the probability variation time reduction flag 223e is off (S2202: Yes), the gaming state is normal. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the player is making a right-handed hit, first, it is determined whether or not the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203). As a result, if the second through gate passage flag 223g is off (S2203: No), after resetting the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), right-handed left. The hit determination process ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S2203, when the second through gate passage flag 223g is on (S2203: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is 0 (S2204). As a result, if the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is 0 (S2204: Yes), 1 is set in the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate, and the counter for the number of balls passing through the second through gate is set to 223k. 1 is set (S2205). Then, after resetting the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

Further, as a result of the processing of S2204, if the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is not 0 (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is 2 (S2207). ). As a result, when the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is 1 instead of 2, (S2207: No), 1 is added to the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k (S2210), and the first through gate is passed. After resetting the flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k is 2 as a result of the processing of S2207 (S2207: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S2208. Here, as described above, the update of the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is performed every 1 millisecond by the processing of S1912 in the main processing (see FIG. 23), and the case where the value is 0 is maintained at 0. On the other hand, if the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and if the value is 10000, it is initialized to 0.

Therefore, it is determined that the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate is not 0 by the processing of S2204 (S2204: No), and the value of the ball count counter 223k passing through the second through gate is 2 by the processing of S2207. If it is determined (S2207: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board within a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be hitting right. On the other hand, when the gaming state is normal, left-handed is more advantageous for the player as described above.

Therefore, in this case, a left-handed instruction screen display command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S2208). By receiving this left-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "left-handed" shown in FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be directed to "hit the ball to the left", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

After the processing of S2208, 0 is set in the time counter 223i after passing through the second through gate, 0 is set in the second through gate passing ball number counter 223k (S2209), and the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate are set. After resetting the through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

Further, when it is determined that the probability change time reduction flag 223e is on as a result of the processing of S2202 (S2202: No), the gaming state is in the probability change or the time reduction. Therefore, the process proceeds to S2211 in FIG. 27.

In the process of S2211, in order to determine whether or not the player is left-handed, first, it is determined whether or not the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211). As a result, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is off (S2211: No), the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. 26, and the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off. After that (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, as a result of the processing of S2211, if the first through gate passage flag 223f is on (S2211: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0. (S2212). As a result, if the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is 0 (S2212: Yes), 1 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and 1 is set in the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate, and the number of balls passing through the first through gate is 223j. 1 is set (S2213). Then, the process proceeds to S2219 in FIG. 26, the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g are reset to off (S2219), and then the right-handed left-handed determination process is completed.

Further, returning to FIG. 27, if the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is not 0 as a result of the processing of S2212 (S22212: No), then whether or not the number of balls passing through the first through gate 223j is 2. Is determined (S2215). As a result, when the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j is not 2 but 1, (S2215: No), 1 is added to the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223j (S2218), and in S2219 of FIG. The process proceeds, and after resetting the first through gate passing flag 223f and the second through gate passing flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, returning to FIG. 27, if the value of the first through gate passing ball number counter 223j is 2 as a result of the processing of S2215 (S2215: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S2216. Here, as described above, the update of the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is performed every 1 millisecond by the processing of S1912 of the main processing (see FIG. 23), and the case where the value is 0 is maintained at 0. On the other hand, if the value is 1 to 9999, 1 is added to the value, and if the value is 10000, it is initialized to 0.

Therefore, it is determined that the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is not 0 by the processing of S2212 (S22212: No), and the value of the ball count counter 223j passing through the first through gate is 2 by the processing of S2215. If it is determined (S2215: Yes), it means that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board within a short time of 10 seconds or less. Therefore, in this case, it can be determined that the player may be left-handed. On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the probable change or the time is shortened, right-handed is more advantageous for the player as described above.

Therefore, in this case, a right-handed instruction screen display command for transmission to the display control device 114 is set (S2216). By receiving this right-handed instruction screen display command, the display control device 114 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" shown in FIG. 10B on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can be directed to "hit the ball" to "right-hand", and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

After the processing of S2216, the time counter 223h after passing through the first through gate is set to 0, the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223j is set to 0 (S2217), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2219 in FIG. After resetting the first through gate passage flag 223f and the second through gate passage flag 223g to off (S2219), the right-handed left-handed determination process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the action and effect of this right-handed left-handed determination process will be described. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing “right-handed” when the gaming state is in the probable change or the time reduction. , (A) is a diagram showing an example in which only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds, and (b) shows the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds. It is a figure which showed the example when the sphere has passed at least 3 spheres.

Note that FIG. 28 shows the case where the game state is in the probable change or the time is shortened, but when the game state is in the normal state, the ball of the second through gate 67 passes and the ball instructing “left-handed” is hit. The relationship with the display of the direction instruction screen is also the relationship between the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the display of the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "right-handed" when the game state is in the probable change or the time reduction. Since they are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), when the 1st through gate passage flag 223g is turned on, it means that the sphere has passed through the 1st through gate 67. Further, when the output of the right-handed instruction screen display command is "Yes", it means that the hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds when the game state is probable change or time reduction, first, as shown in FIG. 28 (a), the number of balls passing through the first through gate. When the counter 223i is 0 and the first ball passes through the first through gate 67, the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223i is counted up to 1. Then, if the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds from the count-up, the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223i is counted up to 2. However, when 10 seconds have passed since the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i was first counted up, the counter updating process (S1912) of the main process (see FIG. 23) also causes the first through-gate passing ball number counter 223i. It is initialized to 0. As a result, when only two balls pass through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, the right-handed instruction screen display command is not output to the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 does not output the right-handed instruction screen display command. , The hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed" can be hidden.

On the other hand, when three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 in 10 seconds when the gaming state is in the probable change or the time is shortened, first, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), the first through. When the gate passing ball number counter 223i is 0 and the first ball passes through the first through gate 67, the first through gate passing ball number counter 223i is counted up to 1. Then, if the second ball passes through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds from the count-up, the number of balls passing through the first through gate counter 223i is counted up to 2. Further, when the third ball passes through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds after the first through gate passing ball counter 223i first counts up, S2216 of the right-handed left-handed determination process (FIG. 27). ), A right-handed instruction screen display command is output to the display control device 114. As a result, when the game state is in the probable change or the time is shortened, if three or more balls pass through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, it is determined that the player is hitting the left side, and the third symbol is used. On the display device 81, it is possible to display a hitting direction instruction screen for instructing "right-handed".

Here, in a conventional pachinko machine, for example, when it is advantageous for a player to hit right, the player can hit left only by passing one ball through the through gate on the left side of the game board. There was one that judged that it was doing and gave a notification instructing "right-handed". However, even if the player is right-handed, it is quite possible that some balls will flow down the left side of the game board, and the balls are on the left side of the game board. It is quite possible to pass through the through gate. It is bothersome for the player to be instructed to "hit right" each time. Further, even if the player is hitting to the left, if a notification instructing "right-handing" is given every time a ball passes through the through gate, the notification will occur frequently. After all it makes the player feel annoying.

On the other hand, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change or the time reduction, by detecting that three balls have passed through the first through gate 67 within 10 seconds, the probabilistic change or the time reduction is in progress. A right-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing the player to “right-handed” in an advantageous manner. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the pachinko machine 10 detects that three balls have passed through the second through gate 670 within 10 seconds, thereby playing the game in the normal state. A left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the hitting direction instruction screen instructing "left-handed" which is advantageous to the person. As a result, even though the player is firing the ball in an advantageous direction, some of the balls are launched in a direction different from the advantageous direction, so that a screen instructing the hitting direction is displayed one by one. It can be suppressed from being done. Further, even if the player shoots the ball in a direction different from the advantageous direction, it is possible to suppress the frequent display of the screen instructing the hitting direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being hindered by the screen instructing the direction of hitting the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this audio reproduction setting process (S1916). As described above, the voice reproduction setting process (S1916) sets the audio data matching the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the reproduction audio data storage area 223d in response to the display command received from the display control device 114. It is a process. Further, in this audio reproduction setting process, when two reach audios are being reproduced, the processing of stopping the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach audio (normal reach audio that started reproduction later) is also performed.

In this audio reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2301). The reach voice reproduction counter 223c counts the number of reach voices being reproduced. When the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c is not 2 but 0 or 1 (S2301: No), that is, when the reach voice is not played or only one reach voice is played, then RAM223 The first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in the above, and it is determined whether or not the reach display command is received (S2302).

Then, when the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), it is further determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is transmitted from the voice data storage area 222. It is read and set as an empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2309), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated. If it is determined that no other display command has been received as a result of the processing of S2307 (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

Further, when the reach display command is received as a result of the processing of S2302 (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is used as the 0th symbol of the voice data storage area 222a. Normal reach audio data 222a0, 1st symbol probability variation reach audio data 222a1, 2nd symbol normal reach audio data 222a2, ... 9th probability variation reach audio data 222a9, read from, and reproduced audio data storage area 223d 1st to 1st It is set in the vacant channel area of the fourth channel area 223d1 to 223d4, and the reproduction of the reach sound is started (S2303). Then, 1 is added to the reach audio reproduction counter 223c (S2304) to end the audio reproduction setting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing of S2301 (S2301: Yes), since the two reach audios are being reproduced, the most recently reproduced reach is performed. The sound, that is, the reach sound that was last started to be played is stopped (S2305). Then, the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2306), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the action and effect of executing this audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of the reach voice when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display. When is satisfied and displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 on the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probabilistic reach. Outputs the probabilistic reach audio corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced in a sound section as soon as the reproduction is started. Further, when the probabilistic reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach. Outputs normal reach audio corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started, the silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 2.

When the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 2, the voice lamp control device 114 stops the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach voice, that is, the normal reach voice which started the reproduction later. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are once played back, but the normal reach voice is immediately stopped playing. , Only the probabilistic reach voice will be played to the end. Since the first 20 milliseconds of the normal reach sound is a silent section, even if the normal reach sound is once started to be played, the normal reach sound is stopped during the playback of the silent section. ..

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device has a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device and "normally". When a command notifying "reach was established" was received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice were superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command is output. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played is two, the reach voice played most recently, that is, the normal reach that started playing later. Stop playing audio. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are once played back, but the normal reach voice is immediately stopped playing. , Only the probabilistic reach voice will be played to the end. Since the first 20 milliseconds of the normal reach sound is a silent section, even if the normal reach sound is once started to be played, the normal reach sound is stopped during the playback of the silent section. .. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then the reach display command is transmitted. Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. In the voice lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, the reach display command is transmitted. Playback of the two reach voices is started in sequence. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that the two reach voices are being reproduced, the voice lamp control device 113 stops the reproduction of the reach voice (the reach voice which started the reproduction later) which started the most recently. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is a probabilistic reach or a normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed in, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing the increase in the processing load, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

The reach voice playing counter 223c stops playing the most recently played reach voice (normal reach voice that started playing later) because the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2". It is initialized to "0" according to the operation. Since the reproduction of the probabilistic reach sound is continued, the value of the reach sound reproduction counter 223c should be set to "1". However, the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach voice to be reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the reproduction thereof is performed. After the stop control is performed, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at least while the probabilistic reach sound is being reproduced. Therefore, if the reach voice playing counter 223c is initialized to "0" in accordance with stopping the playback of the most recently played reach voice (normal reach voice that started playing later), the reach voice is being played. Since it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice in order to initialize the counter 223c to "0", the process can be simplified.

Further, the reach voice reproduction counter 2232c is initialized to "0" even when a display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. If another display command is received while the reach voice is being played back, the reach voice playback is continued. Therefore, the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c should be set to "1". However, the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is used to stop the reproduction of the normal reach voice to be reproduced later when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the two reach display commands are configured to be continuously transmitted from the display control device 81, and the reach voice is reproduced. When another display command is received during, it can be determined that the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, at least while the reach sound is being reproduced, the double reach is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, when a display command other than the reach display command is received from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113, if the reach voice playback counter 223c is initialized to "0", the reach voice playback can be performed. Since it is not necessary to determine whether to stop the reproduction of the reach voice in order to initialize the middle counter 223c to "0", the process can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when this is done. The V-interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V-interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds to complete the drawing process of the image for one frame. do.

Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 31, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

In this main process, the initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, a process of clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup has started normally.

After the process of S2401, the interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 13) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, since the image controller 237 does not receive the drawing instruction of the next image at the stage where the drawing processing and the display processing of the image are not completed, the drawing of a new image may be started during the drawing of the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

In this V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is read from the display data table storage area 232a. , Set to the display data table buffer 233a.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of the variable effect and the continuous advance notice effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and the effect image corresponding to the mode. Can be controlled to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the display setting process (S2603), in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the command determination process (S1402) or the like, the third symbol display device is based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233b. In 81, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specifically specified. Further, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, if the address indicated by the pointer 233b specifies the display content (see FIG. 12) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display content is specified. A display command for notifying the display content to the voice lamp control device 113 is generated, and a process for transmitting the generated display command to the voice lamp control device 113 is performed.

In the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, when a plurality of display contents are specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233b, the display contents are specified in order from the display contents specified above. A display command to be represented is generated, and the display command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, when the double reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, the probability variation reach is first established as the display content at the address at the timing when the establishment of the double reach is displayed in the display data table. "Probability change reach is established" is defined together with the type of the main symbol, and then "normal reach is established" is defined together with the type of the main symbol for which the normal reach is established. Therefore, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then immediately performs the normal reach. It is configured to send a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the established reach symbol.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a command (for example, display variation) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 in the display control device 114 by the command determination process and the display setting process. It should be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 according to the pattern command) or the like. The effect image can be changed.

When the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like a conventional pachinko machine, it becomes complicated due to the diversification of the effect images. Since a large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing an enormous amount of programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable production images will be limited. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, the task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2603), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S1406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S1405), which are determined in the task process (S1404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sets the probabilistic reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81. A reach display command is sent to notify the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that has been established, and then immediately, a reach display command that notifies the reach establishment is sent together with the type of reach symbol that has established a normal reach. .. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command, it outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command for the time being. Then, when it is determined that the number of reach voices being played is two, the play of the reach voice that started the most recently (the normal reach voice that started the playback later) is stopped.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, when the probability variation reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of whether it is a double reach or a single reach, the display control device. After transmitting the reach display command notifying the reach establishment to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probabilistic reach, 114 issues a normal reach voice reproduction stop command to the voice lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probabilistic reach. It is the same as the first embodiment in that immediately after the reach display command is transmitted, the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. However, in the second embodiment, the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established to the voice lamp control device 114, and then the probability change. When 10 milliseconds have passed since the reach display command notifying the reach establishment was transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that established the reach, the normal reach voice playback stop command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 114. This is different from the first embodiment.

Then, in the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice reproduction command from the display control device 114, if there is one reach voice being reproduced at that time, the probability change transmitted before that. Since only the probabilistic reach voice is output based on the reach display command that notifies the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the reach, the output of the probabilistic reach voice is continued. On the other hand, when there are two reach voices being played when the normal reach voice reproduction command from the display control device 114 is received, the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the probabilistic reach is established. Probability change reach voice and normal reach voice based on the reach display command that notifies the establishment of reach together with the type of reach symbol and the reach display command that notifies the establishment of reach together with the type of reach symbol that established normal reach. The voice lamp control device 113 continues the output of the probabilistic reach voice, while stopping the output of the normal reach voice.

In the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 establish a probabilistic reach. A point in which a normal reach voice playback stop command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 when 10 milliseconds have passed after the reach display command notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of the reach symbol. It is the same as the first embodiment except that. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 33 describes the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. In this audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2311 is executed instead of the process of S2301 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

In the processing of S2311, the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the normal reach voice playback stop command is received. Whether or not it is determined (S2311). Then, if the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is not received, the same processes of S2302 to S2304 and S2307 to S2309 as in the first embodiment are executed. On the other hand, if the normal reach audio reproduction stop command is received as a result of the processing of S2311 (S2311: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is 2 (S2312).

As a result, if the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No), the audio reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. When the value of the reach voice playback counter 223c is not 2 (S2312: No) in the state where the normal reach voice playback stop command is received (S2311: Yes), the probabilistic reach as a single reach is set to the third symbol display device 81. 10 milliseconds after the display control device 114 sends a reach display command to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach. This is the case when the reach audio playback stop command is received. Therefore, in this case, only the probabilistic reach sound is reproduced, and the reproduction of the probabilistic reach sound can be continued by ending the sound reproduction setting process as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing of S2312 (S2312: Yes), the same processing of S2305 and S2306 as in the first embodiment is executed. That is, in the process of S2305, the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach voice, that is, the reach voice that started the last reproduction is stopped (S2305).

When the value of the reach voice playback counter 223c is 2 (S2312: Yes) in the state where the normal reach voice playback stop command is received (S2311: Yes), the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Based on the reach display command that notifies the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established the probabilistic reach, and the reach display command that notifies the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established the normal reach. , When the normal reach voice playback stop command is received while the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are being played. Therefore, in this case, the normal reach sound can be stopped by stopping the playback of the reach sound that has just started to be played by the process of S2305.

Here, with reference to FIG. 34, the action and effect of executing this audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 34A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of the reach voice when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 34B is an explanatory diagram on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reproduction of the reach sound at the time of displaying the single reach of a probable variation reach.

First, referring to FIG. 34 (a), in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and the lower symbol row Z3 is further slow-moved. When the double reach is established and displayed when the display is stopped from the display, the display control device 114 first sets the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as a probabilistic reach. Sends a reach display command to notify the reach establishment together with the type of reach symbol that established the normal reach, and then immediately sends a reach display command to notify the establishment of the reach together with the type of reach symbol that established the normal reach. do.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probabilistic reach. Outputs the probabilistic reach audio corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced in a sound section as soon as the reproduction is started. Further, when the probabilistic reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach. Outputs normal reach audio corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started, the silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 2.

When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, the display control device 114 issues a normal reach voice playback stop command 10 milliseconds after the transmission. Send to 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command to stop the normal reach voice reproduction, if the value of the reach voice reproduction in-counter 223c is 2, the most recently reproduced reach audio, that is, the reproduction is started later. Stop playing the normal reach audio. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are once reproduced, but in the normal reach voice, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced. The reproduction is stopped when about 10 milliseconds have passed since then, and only the probabilistic reach sound is reproduced to the end. Since the first 20 milliseconds of the normal reach sound is a silent section, even if the normal reach sound is once started to be played, the normal reach sound is stopped during the playback of the silent section. ..

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device has a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device and "normally". When a command notifying "reach was established" was received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice were superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command is output. On the other hand, when the normal reach sound reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the reproduction of the most recently reproduced reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound which started the reproduction later is stopped. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are once reproduced, but the normal reach voice starts the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice. The reproduction is stopped about 10 milliseconds after that, and only the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced to the end. Since the first 20 milliseconds of the normal reach sound is a silent section, even if the normal reach sound is once started to be played, the normal reach sound is stopped during the playback of the silent section. .. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then the reach display command is transmitted. Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established. In the voice lamp control device 113, first, according to the received reach display command, the reach display command is transmitted. Playback of the two reach voices is started in sequence. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice playback stop command after the two reach voices are played back, the voice lamp control device 113 plays back the reach voice (reach voice that started playing later) that has just started playing. Stop. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is a probabilistic reach or a normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed in, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing the increase in the processing load, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34 (b), in the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is displayed. When the stop display is performed from the low-speed display and the probability variation reach is established and displayed as a single reach, the display control device 114 displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the voice lamp control device 113. A reach display command is sent to notify the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, the voice lamp control device 114 corresponds to the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probabilistic reach. Outputs probabilistic reach audio. As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced in a sound section as soon as the reproduction is started. Further, when the probabilistic reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

When the display control device 114 transmits a reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, the display control device 114 issues a normal reach voice playback stop command 10 milliseconds after the transmission. Send to 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command to stop the normal reach voice reproduction, if the value of the reach voice reproduction in-progress counter 223c is 1, the audio reproduction setting process ends the process as it is. As a result, the output of the probabilistic reach voice can be continued.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the double reach for the time being according to the reach display command from the display control device 114. After outputting the constituent probabilistic reach audio, the normal reach audio is output, and then when it is determined that there are two reach audios being played, the reach audio that started playing most recently (normal that started playing later). Reach audio) has stopped playing. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when it is determined that the number of reach voices being played is two, the reach voice that has started playing most recently, that is, the normal reach voice that has started playing later. Overwrite all voice data with silence data.

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment except for a part of the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 35 describes the audio reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. In this audio reproduction setting process, the process of S2321 is executed instead of the process of S2305 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 29).

That is, when it is determined that the value of the reach voice reproducing counter 223c is 2 as a result of the processing of S2301 (S2301: Yes), since the two reach voices are being reproduced, the latest, that is, the last The silent data is overwritten on the audio data set in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d (S2321). Then, after the processing of S2321, the same processing of S2306 as in the first embodiment is executed, and the audio reproduction setting processing is completed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the action and effect of executing this audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of the reach voice when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display. When is satisfied and displayed, the display control device 114 first displays the display content of the third symbol display device 81 on the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probabilistic reach. Outputs the probabilistic reach audio corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced in a sound section as soon as the reproduction is started. Further, when the probabilistic reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 1.

Next, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach, this time, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the normal reach. Outputs normal reach audio corresponding to. At this time, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the reproduction of the normal reach sound is started, the silent section is reproduced for the first 20 milliseconds. Further, when the normal reach voice is output, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c becomes 2.

When the value of the reach audio reproduction counter 223c becomes 2, the audio lamp control device 114 has a reproduced audio data storage area in which the audio data of the most recently reproduced reach audio, that is, the normal reach audio that has started reproduction later is set. The silent data is overwritten in any of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4 of 223d. As a result, silence continues to be output as normal reach audio that has been started to be played back later.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device has a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device and "normally". When a command notifying "reach was established" was received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice were superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by the received reach display command is output. On the other hand, when the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c becomes "2" and the number of reach voices being played is two, the reach voice played most recently, that is, the normal reach that started playing later. Silence will continue to be played as audio. As a result, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the probabilistic reach sound and the normal reach sound are reproduced, but since the normal reach sound is reproduced as silence, only the probabilistic reach sound is reproduced. Will be heard by the player. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment can exert the same action and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and third embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command for the time being. bottom. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, it takes a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds) after receiving the reach display command. Is received, the display command is ignored even if the display command is received from the display control device 114.

In the fourth embodiment, the normal reach voice does not require a silent section for 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments, and the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started as in the probabilistic reach voice. Then, the sound section such as "Reach!" Is immediately reproduced. Further, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment excludes a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the voice reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. It is the same as the first and third embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sets the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment has a reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l instead of the reach voice reproduction in-progress counter 223c of the RAM 223 in the first and third embodiments.

The time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is a counter that measures the elapsed time from the start of the reproduction of the reach voice. The time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223, which is executed when the power is turned on. When the value of the reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l is 0, the value of 0 is maintained.

When the MPU 223 starts the reproduction of the reach sound, the MPU 223 sets 1 in the time counter 223l after the start of the reach sound reproduction. When the value of the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction becomes a number other than 0, the counter update process (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond undergoes an update process in which 1 is added. Will be done. Then, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction is set to 0 again when the value becomes 20, and the value is maintained at 0 thereafter. As a result, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction can count 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

The reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l is referred to in the voice reproduction setting process (S1916), and while the reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l shows a value other than 0, a display command is issued from the display control device 114. Even if it is received, the display command is ignored.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a voice reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment.

In the audio reproduction setting process in the fourth embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the time counter 223l after the start of reach audio reproduction is 0 (S2331). As a result, if the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction is 0 (S2331: Yes), the first display received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223. The command is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the normal reach voice playback stop command has been received (S2302).

As a result, if the reach display command is received (S2302: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is used as the 0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0 in the voice data storage area 222a. 1st symbol probabilistic reach audio data 222a1, 2nd symbol normal reach audio data 222a2, ... Read from the 9th probabilistic reach audio data 222a9, and the reproduced audio data storage area 223d is the area 223d1 for the 1st to 4th channels. It is set in the free channel area of ~ 223d4, and the reproduction of the reach sound is started (S2303).

Then, 1 is set in the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction (S2332). Then, the audio reproduction setting process is terminated. By the processing of S2332, the time counter 223l after the start of reach voice reproduction is incremented by 1 until the value becomes "20" in the counter update processing (S1912 in FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 221 every 1 millisecond, and the value is increased. When it becomes "20", the update process for initializing to "0" is performed. That is, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction counts 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction.

As a result of the processing of S2302, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), then it is determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is transmitted from the voice data storage area 222. It is read and set as an empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the audio reproduction setting process is terminated. Further, as a result of the processing of S2307, if no other display command is received (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the time counter after the start of reach voice reproduction is not 0 as a result of the processing of S2331 (S2331: No), it is determined whether or not the display command has been received (S2333). As a result, if the display command is not received (S2333: No), the audio reproduction setting process is terminated as it is. If the display command is received (S2333: Yes), the received display command is deleted (S2334), and the audio reproduction setting process is terminated.

The time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction takes a value other than 0 for 20 milliseconds after the start of the reach voice reproduction. Therefore, the display command received from the display control device 114 is ignored for 20 milliseconds after the reproduction of the reach voice is started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the action and effect of executing this audio reproduction setting process will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction of the reach sound when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the third symbol display device 81, after the high-speed fluctuation of the variation effect is displayed, the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display, and further, the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed from the low-speed display. When is satisfied and displayed, the display control device 114 first sets the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, first, the reach symbol (main symbol) that has established the probabilistic reach. Outputs the probabilistic reach audio corresponding to. As shown in FIG. 9B, the probabilistic reach voice is reproduced in a sound section as soon as the reproduction is started. Further, when the probabilistic reach voice is output, the value of the time counter 223 l after the start of the reach voice reproduction becomes 1. Then, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction counts 20 milliseconds, and takes a value other than 0 during that period.

Next, the voice lamp control device 114 normally receives a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the reach, and this reach display command is the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach. It is a command that is received immediately within 20 milliseconds after receiving the reach display command that notifies the establishment of reach together with the type. That is, when a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is received together with the type of the reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction takes a value other than 0, so this reach display. The command is ignored. Therefore, the reach voice is usually non-output.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device has a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device and "normally". When a command notifying "reach was established" was received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice were superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received for the time being is received. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the value of the time counter 223l after the start of the reach voice reproduction becomes other than 0, and the reach display command to be received next is ignored. That is, the reach sound is not normally output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then the reach display command is transmitted. , Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established, and the voice lamp control device 113 follows the previously received reach display command. Only the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probabilistic reach voice) is output. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is a probabilistic reach or a normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed in, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing the increase in the processing load, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all, so that the normal reach sound does not require a silent section for 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments. Similar to the probabilistic reach voice, when the normal reach voice starts to be played, the sounded section such as "Reach!" Can be played immediately. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a single reach, the voice such as "Reach!" Can be immediately reproduced when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fourth embodiments, the reproduced audio data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is provided with the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to d4, and the audio data for reproducing the reach audio. Was set in any of the areas 223d1 to d4 for the first to fourth channels. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the reproduced audio data storage area 2232d is provided with the reach audio area 223d5 instead of the fourth channel area 223d4, and the audio data for reproducing the reach audio is the reach. Set to the audio area 223d5. Further, even if the reach display command is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 during the reproduction of the reach voice set in the reach voice area 2232d5, the reach display command is ignored.

In the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, the normal reach sound does not require a silent section for 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments, and the reproduction of the normal reach sound starts. When it is done, the sound section such as "Reach!" Is immediately reproduced. Further, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment excludes a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 and a part of the voice reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221. It is the same as the first, third and fourth embodiments. For example, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sets the display content of the third symbol display device 81 together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of reach is transmitted together with the type of reach symbol for which normal reach is established. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various data stored in the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment. The reproduced audio data storage area 223d of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a reach audio area 223d5 instead of the fourth channel area 223d4. Further, the RAM 223 in the fourth embodiment is a flag for using the reach voice area instead of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c in the first and third embodiments and the reach voice reproduction start time counter 223l in the fourth embodiment. It has 223m.

The reach audio area 223d5 is a dedicated area for exclusively storing audio data for reproducing the reach audio. When the MPU 221 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the MPU 221 receives voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (0th symbol normal reach voice data 222a0, 1st symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a1, 2nd). One of the symbol normal reach voice data 222a2, ..., The ninth symbol probability variation reach voice data 222a9) is read from the voice data storage area 222a, and the read reach voice data is stored in the reach voice area 223d5.

The MPU 221 decodes the audio data stored in the first to third channel areas 223d1 to d3 and the reach audio area 223d5, and generates an audio signal. Then, after mixing the audio signals generated for each audio reproduction channel, the audio signals are output to the audio output device 226. As a result, the four audio data can be reproduced at the same time and output from the audio output device 226.

The reach voice area in use flag 223m is a flag indicating that the reach voice data is set (stored) in the reach voice area 223m and the reach voice is played using the set reach voice data. be. When the reach voice area in use flag 223m is on, it indicates that the reach voice is being played using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m. Further, when the reach voice area in use flag 223m is off, it indicates that the reach voice is not reproduced by using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223m.

The reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to off as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach voice data is set in the reach voice area 223d5, and the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223d5 is used. Then, when the output of the reach voice is started, the reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to ON. If another reach display command is received from the display control device 114 when the reach voice area in use flag 223m is on, the reach display command is ignored. Then, when the reproduction of the reach voice using the reach voice data set in the reach voice area 223d5 is completed, the reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to off.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a voice reproduction setting process (S1916) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment.

In this audio reproduction setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the reach audio currently being played has finished playback (S2341), and whether or not the reach audio has been played so far, or even if it is being played, is still there. If it is determined that the playback has not been completed (S2341: No), then the first display command received from the display control device 114 among the unprocessed commands is input from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223. It is read and analyzed, and it is determined whether or not the normal reach voice reproduction stop command has been received (S2302).

As a result, if the reach display command has not been received (S2302: No), then it is determined whether or not another display command has been received (S2307). As a result, when another display command is received (S2307: Yes), the voice data corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 indicated by the received display command is transmitted from the voice data storage area 222. It is read and set as an empty channel area of the first to fourth channel areas 223d1 to 223d4 of the reproduced audio data storage area 223d, and audio reproduction is started (S2308). Then, the audio reproduction setting process is terminated. Further, as a result of the processing of S2307, if no other display command is received (S2307: No), the audio reproduction setting processing is terminated as it is.

As a result of the processing of S2302, if the reach display command is received (S2302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the reach voice area in use flag 223m is off (S2342). As a result, if the reach voice area in use flag 223m is off (S2342: Yes), the reach voice data corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command is the 0th symbol normal reach of the voice data storage area 222a. Audio data 222a0, 1st symbol probabilistic reach audio data 222a1, 2nd symbol normal reach audio data 222a2, ... 9th probabilistic reach audio data 222a9, read from, and reproduced audio data storage area 223d reach audio area 223d5 Is set to, and the reproduction of the reach sound is started (S2343). Then, the reach voice area in use flag 223m is set to ON (S2344), and the voice reproduction setting process is terminated.

Further, as a result of the processing of S2342, if the reach voice area in use flag 223m is on (S2342: No), the received reach display command is deleted (S2335), and the voice reproduction setting processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach audio currently being played has finished playback as a result of the processing of S2341 (S2341: Yes), the reach audio area in use flag 223m is set to off (S2346), and the audio is played. Ends the playback setting process.

Here, when the double reach is displayed in the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first establishes a probabilistic reach as the display content of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the voice lamp control device 113. A reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has been made, and then immediately, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established.

At this time, when the voice lamp control device 114 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach, the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach by the voice reproduction setting process. The audio data for reproducing the probabilistic reach voice corresponding to (main symbol) is set in the reach audio area 223d5, and the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice is started. At this time, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use until the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice is completed, and the reach voice area use flag 223m is turned on.

Next, the voice lamp control device 114 normally receives a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the reach, and this reach display command is the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach. It is a command that is received immediately after receiving the reach display command that notifies the establishment of reach together with the type. That is, when the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is received together with the type of the reach symbol that normally establishes the reach, the reach voice area 223d5 is in use, and the reach voice area use flag 223m is set. It is on. As a result, this reach display command is ignored, and the reach voice is normally output.

Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when a double reach occurs in the third symbol display device, the voice lamp control device has a command to notify "probability change reach establishment" as the display content of the third symbol display device and "normally". When a command notifying "reach was established" was received from the display control device, the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice were superimposed and output from the voice output device. However, as described above, when the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice are different voices according to the character symbol corresponding to the main symbol that has become the reach symbol, when these voices are output in an overlapping manner, There was a problem that it became difficult to hear each reach voice.

In addition, it is conceivable to make it easier to hear each reach voice by outputting the words uttered in each voice completely in the probabilistic reach voice and the normal reach voice, but for that purpose, it is possible to make each reach voice easier to hear. , The timing of the words to be uttered must be matched, and each reach voice becomes uniform only with different voices, which makes it uninteresting. In addition, in the first place, outputting the words uttered by each voice in a completely overlapping timing requires that the output of each reach voice be reproduced while being strictly synchronized, which complicates control. The problem also arises.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to prepare voice data for double reach, but it is necessary to prepare the voice data for each combination of two sets of main symbols (normal symbol and probabilistic symbol) that have established double reach. There is a risk of increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 222.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, the reach display command received for the time being is received. While the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol (main symbol) indicated by is output, the reach voice area 223d5 is in the in-use state, and the reach display command to be received next is ignored. That is, the reach sound is not normally output by the reach display command received later. Therefore, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol for which the probabilistic reach is established, and then the reach display command is transmitted. , Immediately, a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established, and the voice lamp control device 113 follows the previously received reach display command. Only the reach voice corresponding to the reach symbol indicated by the reach display command (as a result, the probabilistic reach voice) is output. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 does not determine whether the reach display command received from the display control device 114 is a probabilistic reach or a normal reach, and as a result, the double reach is the third symbol display device 81. When displayed in, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while suppressing the increase in the processing load, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the double reach is established, the normal reach sound is not reproduced at all, so that the normal reach sound does not require a silent section for 20 milliseconds as in the first to third embodiments. Similar to the probabilistic reach voice, when the normal reach voice starts to be played, the sounded section such as "Reach!" Can be played immediately. Therefore, even when the normal reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a single reach, the voice such as "Reach!" Can be immediately reproduced when the reproduction of the normal reach voice is started.

The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims. The "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims, and the "normal jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first game" described in the claims. Corresponding to "value", the "probability variation jackpot" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "second game value" described in the claims. The "normal reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first effect mode" described in the claims, and the "probability variation reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "second effect" described in the claims. The "double reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "third effect mode" described in the claims. The "normal reach voice" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first voice" described in the claims, and the "probability variation reach voice" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first voice" described in the claims. Corresponds to "2 voices". The "normal" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "first state" described in the claims, and the "probability changing" and "time saving" described in the above embodiments are described in the claims. Corresponds to the "second state".

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in the first to third embodiments, the case where the number of reach voices being played is counted between 0 and 2 in the reach voice playing counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. However, the reach audio reproduction counter 223c may be composed of a 1-bit counter. In this case, the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process (see S1810 in FIG. 22) of the RAM 223 executed when the power is turned on. Then, when the reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach is received from the display control device 114 and the reproduction of the reach voice is started, 1 is added to the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c by the MPU 221.

Here, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first transmits a reach display command notifying the establishment of the reach together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the probabilistic reach. Then, immediately after that, a reach display command for notifying the establishment of the reach is transmitted together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach. Therefore, in this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the second normal reach, the value of the reach voice reproduction counter 223c is 0. It becomes.

The voice lamp control device 113 starts playing the reach voice, adds 1 to the reach voice playing counter 223c, checks the value of the reach voice playing counter 223c, and if the value is 0, 2 It is determined that one reach sound is being played, and the most recently played reach sound, that is, the normal reach sound that started playing later is stopped, or the normal reach sound that started playing after that is stopped. The silent data is overwritten on the audio data set in the reproduced audio data storage area 223d for reproduction. Alternatively, when the normal reach voice playback stop command is received from the display control device 114, if the value of the reach voice playback counter 223c is 0, it is determined that two reach voices are being played, and the two reach voices are played most recently. Reach audio, that is, audio data set in the playback audio data storage area 223d to stop playback of the normal reach audio that started later, or to reproduce the normal reach audio that started playback after that. On the other hand, the silent data is overwritten.

Also with these, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

When the reach voice playing counter 223c is composed of a 1-bit counter, the reach voice playing counter 223c receives other display commands other than the reach display command from the display control device 114 by the voice lamp control device 113. If so, it may be initialized to "0".

In the second embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal reach voice playback stop command from the display control device 114, it is determined that the two reach voices are being played, and the voice lamp control device 113 is immediately played back. The case of stopping the playback of the reach audio, that is, the normal reach audio that started later, has been described, but the playback audio data for playing the normal reach audio that started later instead of stopping the playback. Silence data may be overwritten on the voice data set in the storage area 223d. Also with this, as in the second embodiment, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

In the first to third embodiments, the case where the normal reach voice is reproduced in the voice lamp control device 113 and the case where the reproduction is started for 20 milliseconds is a silent section has been described. The time length does not necessarily have to be 20 milliseconds. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the time required from the start of the reproduction of the normal reach sound by the voice lamp control device 113 to the stop of the reproduction, or the reproduction of the normal reach sound is performed. The silent section of the normal reach voice is 20 if it is longer than the time required for the voice data set in the playback voice data storage area 223d to be overwritten with the silent data after the start. It may be shorter or longer than milliseconds.

In the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, all the display commands from the display control device 114 are executed for 20 milliseconds after the reproduction of the reach voice is started. The case of ignoring has been described, but the time for ignoring the display command does not necessarily have to be 20 milliseconds. When the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction of the probabilistic reach voice is started by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the first reach display command transmitted from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a second reach display command (a reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established) transmitted from the display control device 114. The time for ignoring the display command may be any length as long as it is longer than the time required for determination.

In the fourth embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reach display command from the display control device 114, all the display commands from the display control device 114 are ignored for a predetermined second after starting the reproduction of the reach voice. However, it may be configured to ignore only the reach display command for a predetermined time after starting the playback of the reach sound, or ignore only some commands including the reach display command. It may be configured as follows. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

In the first to third embodiments, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first notifies the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the probabilistic reach. The case where the reach display command to be sent is sent, and then the reach display command for notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol for which the normal reach is established is sent immediately has been described, but two reach display commands are transmitted. The order may be reversed. That is, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 first sends a reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that established the normal reach. After that, it may be configured to immediately send a reach display command notifying the reach establishment together with the type of the reach symbol that has established the normal reach. In this case, as a modification of the first embodiment, when it is determined that the two reach voices are being played, the voice lamp control device 113 normally reproduces the normal reach voice that started the playback first. The reach voice may be stopped while playing the silent section. Alternatively, as a modification of the second embodiment, if the voice lamp control device 113 reproduces two reach voices when the normal reach voice reproduction stop command is received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 first reproduces the sound. The reproduction of the started normal reach sound may be stopped while the normal reach sound is playing the silent section. Alternatively, as a modification of the third embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 determines that two reach voices are being played, the playback voice is used to reproduce the normal reach voice that has started playback earlier. The silent data may be overwritten on the voice data set in the data storage area 223d. Also in this case, when the double reach is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, only the probabilistic reach voice can be heard by the player.

In each of the above embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 has four voice reproduction channels and is configured to be capable of reproducing voice for four channels, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device is not limited to this. The 113 may have a plurality of audio reproduction channels and may be configured to be capable of reproducing audio for the plurality of channels.

In each of the above embodiments, when the gaming state is normal, the passage of balls to the second through gate 670 on the right side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are sent to the second through gate in 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player is hitting right when passing 670 has been described, but the condition for determining right-handed is only one example, and two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls are second in a predetermined time. It may be configured so that the player determines that the player is hitting right when passing through the through gate 670.

In each of the above embodiments, when the game state is probable change or the time is shortened, the passage of balls to the first through gate 67 on the left side of the game board is monitored, and at least three balls are generated in 10 seconds. The case where it is determined that the player is hitting the left when passing through the first through gate 67 has been described, but the condition for determining the left hit is an example, and the number of balls of 2 or more is determined within a predetermined time. It may be configured so that when the ball passes through the first through gate 67, it is determined that the player is hitting the left side.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the left-handed or right-handed instruction to be given to the player is given by displaying the hitting direction instruction screen on the third symbol display device 81 shown in FIG. 10 has been described. The left-handed or right-handed instruction is not necessarily limited to the case where the display is performed by the third symbol display device 81, and a lamp (for example, a lamp in the shape of an arrow) instructing the left-handed or right-handed is used as a pachinko machine. The machine 10 may be provided at a position recognizable when viewed from the front, and the player may be instructed to hit left or right by turning on or blinking this lamp. Further, the right-handed or left-handed instruction may be output by voice from the voice output device 226.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether the player is hitting right or left is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and display control is performed. It may be performed by the device 114. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first through gate passage command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates to the display control device 114 that the ball has passed through the first through gate 67. All you have to do is send a through-gate pass command. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second through gate passage command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 indicates to the display control device 114 that the ball has passed through the second through gate 670. All you have to do is send a gate pass command.

Further, the main control device 110 may determine whether the player is hitting right or left. The main control device 110 originally grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and also inputs a switch for detecting the passage of the ball of the first through gate 67 and the passage of the ball of the second through gate 670. Therefore, the main control device 110 can easily make the determination. When the main control device 110 determines whether the player is hitting right or left, the main control device 110 determines that the player is hitting right while the gaming state is normal. If it is determined, the left-handed instruction screen display command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, and if it is determined that the player is left-handed while the game state is normal, the voice lamp control device A right-handed instruction screen display command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 via 113.

In each of the above embodiments, if it is determined that the player is right-handed when the game state is normal, the player is instructed to left-handed in favor of the player, and the game state is probable changing or shortening the time. In the case of the middle, if it is determined that the player is left-handed, the case of instructing the player to right-handed in favor of the player has been described, but only when the game state is normal, the player If it is determined that the player is hitting right, the player is instructed to hit left in favor of the player, and if the game state is changing or the time is shortened, the player does not need to instruct the player to hit the ball. good. On the contrary, if it is determined that the player is left-handed only when the game state is probable change or the time is shortened, the player is instructed to right-handed in favor of the player, and the game state is normal. In this case, it is not necessary to instruct the player in particular the direction of hitting the ball. In particular, the player wants to make more profits when the gaming state is in the probable change or in the short time, so at least when the game state is in the probable change or in the short time, the player is left-handed. When it is determined, by instructing the player to make a right-handed strike that is advantageous to the player, the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display data table is prepared for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect can be expressed, for example. , "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", etc. A display data table is prepared for each element, and according to the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command. After specifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the specified elements required for the variation effect are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may try to do it. In many cases, "variable start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc. are displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, it is possible to efficiently have the data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each image display interval (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments) for one frame for which the drawing process is completed. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the third symbol display device 81 is always driven so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is displayed for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the display data table has described the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn is defined corresponding to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, but this is not necessarily the case. The display content is not limited to the above, and the display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second. Since one frame of image is displayed each time, the display data table may specify the display contents at 1/30 second intervals.

Further, in the display data table, the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is not specified as the sprite type to be drawn specified at each predetermined time interval. May be specified. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. However, instead of displaying the high-speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special figure 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special figure 2 reserved series counter 223b is decremented by 1. Although the case (see S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the special figure 1 of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S1308). The value (NA) of the reserved ball number counter 203d or the special figure 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (see S1310 and S1305 in FIG. 16) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. 1 Hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is set, and the special figure 1 hold ball number command or special figure 2 hold ball number command is controlled by voice lamp from the main controller 110 together with the transmission of the fluctuation pattern command. It may be transmitted to the device 113. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of reserved balls held by the main control device 110. In this case, S2107 to S2109 in FIG. 25 are omitted.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to send a command instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated in place of the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and a flag is generated based on the flag. The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as a warning image may be generated. Further, instead of the display command generated by the display control device 114 and notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a display flag is generated, and based on the display flag, voice data is read from the voice data storage area 222a and the reproduced voice is played. It may be set in the data storage area 223d.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball entry port 64, the winning of the second ball entry port 640, and the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 are the maximum, respectively. Although it is configured to be held up to 4 times, the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the second entrance 640 are displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed numerically or in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls in the area divided into four, and the lamp may be displayed separately from the first symbol display device 37. Or the like may be provided, and the light emitting member may be configured to notify the number of reserved balls.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variation effect, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbol as identification information in the horizontal direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in various ways separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is a gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

The main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the control of the sub-control means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variable effect performed by the display means, the display means is provided with the display means and the sound output means for outputting the sound based on the display content in the display means. In a gaming machine in which a predetermined gaming value is given to a player, the gaming machine is predetermined to the player when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in a variation effect performed by the display means. When the first game value is given as the game value of the above and the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the variation effect performed by the display means, the first game value is given to the player. A second game value that is more advantageous to the player than the game value of the above is given, and it is shown that there is a possibility that the first display mode may be stopped and displayed as the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means. A first effect mode, a second effect mode indicating that the display may be stopped and displayed in the second display mode, and a first effect mode and a second effect mode showing the second effect mode at the same time. As the sound output by the voice output means, the first sound output when the variation effect is performed by the display means in the first effect mode and the display are included. The means includes a second sound output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode, and the sub-control means is the display means in the third effect mode. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the second voice is output from the voice output means when the variation effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine A1, the main control means of the game is performed by the main control means, and the control is performed by the sub-control means based on the control signal from the main control means. Under the control of the sub-control means, the display means performs a variation effect accompanied by dynamic display of the identification information, and the voice is output from the voice output means based on the display content in the display means.

In this gaming machine, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first display mode in the variation effect performed in the display mode, the player is given the first game value as a predetermined game value. Further, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in the variation effect performed in the display mode, the second game is more advantageous to the player than the first game value as a predetermined game value to the player. Value is given. Further, as the effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means, the first effect mode indicating that there is a possibility of stop display in the first display mode and the stop display in the second display mode are possible. A second effect mode showing that there is a property and a third effect mode showing the first effect mode and the second effect mode at the same time are included. Further, when the variable effect is performed by the display means in the first effect mode, the first voice is output from the audio output means, and the variable effect is performed by the display means in the second effect mode. Is output from the audio output means for the second audio.

Here, when the display means performs the variable effect in the third effect mode, that is, when the variable effect is performed in the effect mode in which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are simultaneously shown, the subordinate By the control means, only the second voice is output from the voice output means, and the first voice is not output. As a result, when the variable effect is performed by the display means in the third effect mode, the player listens to the same second voice as in the case where the variable effect is performed in the second display mode. It is possible to increase the expectation that the identification information will be stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value which is advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

In the game machine A1, the sub-control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means is the display. A notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means is described as the display content in the display means when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means outputs based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means. Based on the fact that the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output, and the notification means notify the second effect mode and the first effect mode as the display contents in the display means. The output control means is provided with a stop means for stopping the output of the first voice when the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output. Characterized game machine A2.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the voice output means is controlled by the voice control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

Here, when the display means is subjected to the variable effect in the third effect mode, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are voice-controlled by the notification means of the display control means as the display contents in the display means. Notify the means. Then, when the output of the second voice and the first voice is output as the voice to be output by the output control means of the voice control means, the output of the first voice is stopped by the stop means. As a result, the voice control means once controls to select and output the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means of the display control means, but as the voice to be output. When the second sound and the first sound are output, the output of the first sound is stopped. Therefore, when the display means performs the variable effect in the third effect mode, the second sound is output. Only audio can be output. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, and thus the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Further, since the voice output is first started based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, it is not necessary to determine the presence / absence of the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means. Therefore, there is an effect that an increase in processing load can be suppressed. Further, there is an effect that the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be immediately performed.

In the gaming machine A2, when the notification means performs the variable effect on the display means in the third effect mode, the voice control means first displays the second effect mode as the display content in the display means. The first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the output control means is to output the voice to be output in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means. A3 game machine characterized by selecting and starting output.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content in the display means, and then the first effect. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Further, since the voice to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. First, the output of the second voice is started, and then the output of the first voice is started. After that, the output of the first voice is stopped by the stop means. As a result, the second sound that will be output when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode can be started to be output before the first sound whose output is stopped. When the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

A4 of the gaming machines A4, wherein the first voice is a silent voice for a predetermined time after the output of the voice is started in any of the gaming machines A1 to A3.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are played. That is, since the first voice outputs the voice in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the voice is started, once the variable effect is performed by the display means in the third effect mode. Even if the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output, the silent voice is output from the first voice. Therefore, by stopping the output of the first voice by the time when the predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the first voice, even if the first voice is output for a moment, the player is notified. It has the effect of suppressing the noise that is heard.

In the game machine A1, the sub-control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means is the display. A notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means is described as the display content in the display means when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. The second effect mode and the first effect mode are notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means outputs based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means. Based on the fact that the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output, and the notification means notify the second effect mode and the first effect mode as the display contents in the display means. When the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output by the output control means, the rewriting means for rewriting the first voice into a silent voice and outputting the voice. A game machine B1 characterized by being provided with and.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the voice output means is controlled by the voice control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

Here, when the display means is subjected to the variable effect in the third effect mode, the second effect mode and the first effect mode are voice-controlled by the notification means of the display control means as the display contents in the display means. Notify the means. Then, when the output of the second voice and the first voice is output as the voice to be output by the output control means of the voice control means, the output of the first voice is the voice in a silent state by the rewriting means. It is rewritten to and output. As a result, the voice control means once controls to select and output the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means of the display control means, but as the voice to be output. When the second voice and the first voice are output, the output of the first voice is rewritten into a silent voice and output, so that the display means can perform a variable effect in the third effect mode. When done, the player can be made to hear as if only the second audio was output. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, and thus the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Further, since the voice output is first started based on the notification of the display content from the notification means of the display control means, the effect that the voice output based on the display content notified from the notification means can be immediately performed. There is.

In the gaming machine B1, when the notification means performs the variable effect on the display means in the third effect mode, the voice control means first displays the second effect mode as the display content in the display means. The first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the output control means is to output the voice to be output in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means. The gaming machine B2 characterized in that the output is started by selecting.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content in the display means, and then the first effect. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Further, since the voice to be output is selected and output by the output control means in the order of the display contents in the display means notified by the notification means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. First, the output of the second voice is started, and then the output of the first voice is started. After that, the first voice is rewritten into a silent voice by the rewriting means and output. As a result, the output of the second sound to be heard by the player when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode is started before the first sound that is rewritten into the silent sound. Therefore, when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode, there is an effect that the output of the second sound can be started without delay.

The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, the first voice is to output the voice in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the voice is started.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the first voice outputs the voice in a silent state for a predetermined time after the output of the voice is started, when the display means performs the variable effect in the third effect mode, the first sound is output. Even if the output of the second voice and the first voice is started as the voice to be output, the silent voice is output from the first voice. Therefore, by the time when the predetermined time elapses from the start of the output of the first voice, the first voice is rewritten to the silent voice, so that the player is informed that the first voice becomes noise. It has the effect of suppressing the storage.

In the gaming machine A1, the sub-control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means is the display. A notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means first, as the display content in the display means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. The second effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means is notified by the notification means. When the second effect mode is notified as the display content in the display means by the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output based on the display content in the display means and the notification means. The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that, at least for a predetermined time after receiving the notification, the non-accepting means for making the notification of the first effect mode from the notifying means non-accepting is provided.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the voice output means is controlled by the voice control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

Here, when the display means is subjected to the variable effect in the third effect mode, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content in the display means, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. On the other hand, in the voice control means, when the notification of the second effect mode is received from the notification unit as the display content in the display means, at least a predetermined time after the notification is received, the first effect mode from the notification means is received. The notification is put into the non-reception state by the non-reception means. As a result, when the variable effect is performed by the display means in the third effect mode, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the voice control means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, and thus the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Further, in this case, since the first voice is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in the processing load can be suppressed. Further, since the output of the second sound to be heard by the player when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode can be immediately started, the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. Then, there is an effect that the output of the second voice can be started without delay.

In the game machine A1, the sub-control means includes a display control means for controlling the display in the display means and a voice control means for controlling the output of the voice in the voice output means, and the display control means is the display. A notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the means is provided, and the notification means first, as the display content in the display means, when the variable effect is performed on the display means in the third effect mode. The second effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and then the first effect mode is notified to the voice control means, and the voice control means is notified by the notification means. Based on the output control means that selects the voice to be output and starts the output based on the display content in the display means, and the notification means notifying the first effect mode or the second effect mode. When the first voice or the second voice is selected as the voice to be output by the output control means, the first voice data for outputting the first voice or the second voice is used. When the second voice is output by the output control means based on the storage means for storing the second voice data for outputting the voice and the second voice data stored in the storage means. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the storage means is provided with a storage control means for non-storage of the first voice data even if the notification means notifies the first effect mode.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, the display means is controlled by the display control means provided in the sub control means, and the voice output means is controlled by the voice control means provided in the sub control means. Further, the display content in the display means is notified to the voice control means by the notification means provided in the display control means. Then, the output control means provided in the voice control means selects the voice to be output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means, and the output is started.

Here, when the display means is subjected to the variable effect in the third effect mode, the second effect mode is first notified to the voice control means by the notification means as the display content in the display means, and then the first effect is performed. The mode is notified to the voice control means by the notification means. Then, the output control means of the voice control means first selects a second voice as the voice to be output. Then, the storage means stores the second voice data for outputting the second voice. It should be noted that the storage means is used as a voice to be output by the first voice or the second voice by the output control means based on the notification of the first effect mode or the second effect mode from the notification means. When selected, the first voice data for outputting the first voice or the second voice data for outputting the second voice is stored. When the output control means outputs the second voice based on the second voice data stored in the storage means, the storage control means even if the notification means notifies the first effect mode. The first voice data is not stored in the storage means. As a result, when the variable effect is performed by the display means in the third effect mode, only the second sound can be output by the output control means of the voice control means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second display mode in which the second game value advantageous to the player is given, and thus the interest of the player can be enhanced. There is an effect. Further, in this case, since the first voice is not output at all, there is an effect that an increase in the processing load can be suppressed. Further, since the output of the second sound to be heard by the player when the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode can be immediately started, the variable effect is performed in the third effect mode. Then, there is an effect that the output of the second voice can be started without delay.

A gaming board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the gaming board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball launched by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board. , A determination means that makes a determination when the detection means detects the entry of a ball into the guidance area, and a variation effect accompanied by a dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. In the display means performed and the gaming machine in which the player is given a predetermined game value when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect performed by the display means, the starting area is The game is composed of a first starting area in which a ball launched to the left of the gaming board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball launched to the right of the gaming board is easy to enter. The machine has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states, and if the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting region is the first. 2 It works more favorably for the player than the case where the ball enters the starting area, and if the gaming state is the second state, the case where the ball enters the second starting area is the first starting. It works more favorably for the player than when the ball enters the area, and the gaming machine further comprises a first passing means through which at least a part of the ball flowing down to the left of the gaming board passes. When the gaming state is in the second state, a first detecting means for detecting that two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls have passed through the first passing means during a predetermined time, and a first detection thereof. When it is detected by the means that two or more balls have passed through the first passing means in a predetermined time when the gaming state is in the second state, the ball is played. The gaming machine E1 is provided with a first notification means for notifying the player to fire toward the right side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E1, when the detecting means detects that the ball launched toward the gaming board by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. The determination is made by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the display means performs the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display mode in the variation effect, the game is played. A predetermined game value is given to the person.

In this gaming machine, the starting area is a first starting area where a ball launched to the left of the gaming board can easily enter, and a second starting area where a ball launched to the right of the gaming board can easily enter. It is composed of. Further, this game board has at least a first state and a second state as game states. When the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area works more favorably for the player than the case where the ball enters the second starting area, and the gaming state is the first. In the case of two states, the case where the ball enters the second starting area is more advantageous to the player than the case where the ball enters the first starting area.

Here, when the gaming state is in the second state, the first passing means through which at least a part of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board passes through the first passing means, which is two or more balls in a predetermined number of balls within a predetermined time. When the first detection means detects that the ball has passed, the first notification means notifies the ball to be fired toward the right side of the game board. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to put the ball in the second starting area where the game state is in the second state and the ball launched to the right of the game board is easy to enter. Instead, if there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the left side of the game board, the player can be directed to fire the ball toward the right side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

Further, only when two or more balls have passed through the first passing means within a predetermined time, the player is notified to shoot the balls toward the right side of the game board. Even though the player is firing a ball toward the right side of the game board, some balls flow down to the left side of the game board, and the ball passes through the first passage means. , It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of notification to the player to shoot the ball toward the right side of the game board. Further, even if the player shoots a ball toward the left side of the game board, the ball must pass through the first passing means for two or more balls in a predetermined number of balls within a predetermined time. By notifying the player to fire the ball toward the right side of the game board, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification of the launch direction of the ball is appropriately performed and the notification is frequently performed, so that the interest in the game can be suppressed from being hindered.

A gaming board, a launching means for launching a ball toward the gaming board, and a detecting means for detecting that the ball launched by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board. , A determination means that makes a determination when the detection means detects the entry of a ball into the guidance area, and a variation effect accompanied by a dynamic display of identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. In the display means performed and the gaming machine in which the player is given a predetermined game value when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variation effect performed by the display means, the starting area is The game is composed of a first starting area in which a ball launched to the left of the gaming board is easy to enter, and a second starting area in which a ball launched to the right of the gaming board is easy to enter. The machine has at least a first state and a second state as gaming states, and if the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting region is the first. 2 It works more favorably for the player than the case where the ball enters the starting area, and if the gaming state is the second state, the case where the ball enters the second starting area is the first starting. It works more favorably for the player than when the ball enters the area, and the gaming machine further comprises a second passing means through which at least a part of the ball flowing down to the right of the gaming board passes. When the gaming state is in the first state, a second detecting means for detecting that two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls have passed through the second passing means during a predetermined time, and a second detection means thereof. When the gaming state is in the first state and it is detected that two or more balls having a predetermined number of balls have passed through the second passing means within a predetermined time, the ball is played. The gaming machine E2 is provided with a second notifying means for notifying the player to fire toward the left side of the board.

According to the gaming machine E2, when the detecting means detects that the ball launched toward the gaming board by the launching means has entered a predetermined starting area provided on the gaming board, the detection is triggered. The determination is made by the determination means. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the display means performs the variation effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display mode in the variation effect, the game is played. A predetermined game value is given to the person.

In this gaming machine, the starting area is a first starting area where a ball launched to the left of the gaming board can easily enter, and a second starting area where a ball launched to the right of the gaming board can easily enter. It is composed of. Further, this game board has at least a first state and a second state as game states. When the gaming state is the first state, the case where the ball enters the first starting area works more favorably for the player than the case where the ball enters the second starting area, and the gaming state is the first. In the case of two states, the case where the ball enters the second starting area is more advantageous to the player than the case where the ball enters the first starting area.

Here, when the gaming state is in the first state, the second passing means through which at least a part of the balls flowing down to the right of the game board passes through the second passing means, which is two or more balls in a predetermined number of balls within a predetermined time. When the second detection means detects that the ball has passed, the second notification means notifies the ball to be fired toward the left side of the game board. As a result, it is advantageous for the player to put the ball in the first starting area where the game state is in the first state and the ball fired to the left of the game board is easy to enter. Instead, if there is a possibility that the game ball is being fired toward the right side of the game board, the player can be directed to fire the ball toward the left side of the game board. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous state.

Further, only when two or more balls have passed through the second passing means within a predetermined time, the player is notified to shoot the balls toward the left side of the game board. Even though the player is firing a ball toward the left side of the game board, some balls flow down to the right side of the game board, and the ball passes through the second passage means. , It is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of notification to the player to shoot the ball toward the left side of the game board. Further, even if the player shoots a ball toward the right side of the game board, the ball must pass through the second passing means for two or more balls in a predetermined number of balls within a predetermined time. By notifying the player to fire the ball toward the left side of the game board, it is possible to suppress the frequent occurrence of the notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the notification of the launch direction of the ball is appropriately performed and the notification is frequently performed, so that the interest in the game can be suppressed from being hindered.

A gaming machine F1 in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, E2, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A gaming machine F3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B3, C1, D1, E1, and E2, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effects such as variable effects are displayed on display devices such as liquid crystal displays to improve the interest of games. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting winning prize). A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are combined in a predetermined stop position at the predetermined stop position. (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-272159).
In addition, during scrolling of symbols and the like, an entertaining effect (for example, an effect by reach display) that suggests in advance that a gaming state (for example, a big hit) is advantageous for the player is sometimes performed, which is advantageous. It has also been devised to give players a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, in the effect of reach display, so-called double reach display is performed, which not only suggests that it will be a big hit, but also whether the probability of becoming a big hit after the big hit is high due to the stop symbol when scrolling is stopped. There are also gaming machines that have a production that makes you expect whether or not.
In some conventional gaming machines, when the reach display is performed, different reach sounds are prepared depending on the symbol that establishes the reach display. In this type of gaming machine, when reach occurs in multiple symbols due to double reach display, etc., the reach voice corresponding to each symbol is output, but the reach voice is not always in consideration of the interest of the player. It was not output.
The present technical idea was made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing audio output in consideration of the interest of the player.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board 64 1st entrance (1st starting area)
67 First through gate (first passage means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
110 Main controller (main control means)
112a Ball launch unit (ball launcher)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means, voice control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means, display control means)
223d5 Reach voice area (storage means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
640 2nd entrance (2nd starting area)
670 Second through gate (second passage means)
S1201, S1206 (detection means)
S1308 Fluctuation start processing (determination means)
S1916 Audio playback setting processing (output control means)
S2204 to S2207, S2210 (second detection means)
S2208 (second notification means)
S2212 to S2215, S2218 (first detection means)
S2216 (first notification means)
S2305 (stopping means)
S2321 (rewriting means)
S2334 (non-reception means)
S2342: No (memory control means)
S2603 (Notification means)

Claims (1)

The main control means that performs the main control of the game, the sub-control means that controls based on the control signal from the main control means, and the variable effect accompanied by the dynamic display of the identification information by the control of the sub-control means. When the identification information is stopped and displayed in a predetermined display mode in the variable effect performed by the display means, the player is provided with a predetermined game value. In the given gaming machine
As an effect mode of the variable effect performed by the display means,
The first production mode and
The second production mode and
A third effect mode showing the first effect mode and the second effect mode at the same time is included.
As the sound output by the voice output means,
The first sound output when the variation effect is performed in the first effect mode by the display means, and
The display means includes a second sound output when the variation effect is performed in the second effect mode.
The sub-control means
A display control means for controlling the display in the display means,
A voice control means for controlling the output of voice in the voice output means is provided.
The display control means includes a notification means for notifying the voice control means of the display content in the display means.
When the display means is to perform the variable effect in the third effect mode, the notification means first notifies the voice control means of the second effect mode as the display content in the display means, and then the voice control means. , The first effect mode is notified to the voice control means.
The voice control means is
An output control means that selects a voice to be output and starts output based on the display content in the display means notified by the notification means.
When the second effect mode is notified by the notification means as the display content in the display means, all the notifications from the notification means are not accepted for a predetermined period after receiving the notification. A gaming machine characterized by having a reception means.

Images